Home

CS+ V3.00.00 Integrated Development Environment User`s Manual

1. In the dialog box specify the file name to be created newly and the location in which it is created and then click the OK button The project tree after adding the file and folder will look like the one below Note that the location of the file added below the File node depends on the current settings of Toolbar in the Project Tree panel Figure E 10 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c a E ebu oj AE R7F701010xAFP Microcontroller As None Build Tool Rl RHESO Simulator Debug Tool ER y File 3 Eb Download files R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 265 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 11 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src Ty Pebugtniyl E RIF7O1010AFP Microcontroller Az None Build Tool 2h RHESO Simulator Debug Tool SO File Eb Download files L I El jodefine h E main c By double clicking the added file name on the project tree you can open the Editor panel and edit the contents of the file directly Remark 1 By dragging a file and dropping it onto the Editor panel you can open the file in the Editor panel Remark 2 When the environment is set to use an external text editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external text editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS E 3 3
2. lt gt Invalid build mode name is entered The char acters 1 lt gt cannot be used because the build mode name Is used for the folder name Up to 20 build modes can be added When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the tooltip Message The maximum number of build modes that can be set per project subproject is 20 Function buttons Button Closes this dialog box Description The number of build modes exceed 20 Function Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 189 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run Figure A 30 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build le Build mode list Project Build mode Oetined macros dl sample Detoult Build sample Buildbade Ed sub Die Fault Build 1 F sub EuildiMode Function buttons Build Rebuild Clean Close Hela The
3. Delete Rename Gose Heb Remark 1 Creating a build mode is regarded a project change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to save the build mode R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 270 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Remark 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuild 2 Change the build mode Change the build mode to the newly created build mode a When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target debug dedicated project on the project tree and select the build mode to be changed to with the Build mode property in the Build Mode category on the Build Options tab in the Prop erty panel Figure E 23 Build mode Property b When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure E 24 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings selected build mode Buildhiode 2 Bppl to All Burid mode list Detak Build a Build Mode 2 Duplicate Delete Rename Sie Select the build mode to be changed from Build mode list The selected build mode wil
4. Deletes the selected text while editing the property R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 149 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Select All Selects all the text in the selected property while editing the property Reset to Default Restores the configuration of the selected item to default of the project default configuration For Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option Reset All to Default Restores the configuration of the current tab to default of the project default con figuration For Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 150 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Project tab This tab shows the detailed information on projects main project categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File 2 Notes Figure A 11 Property Panel Project Tab sample Property 4 File Absolute path Cok sample ample rtp Hotes File name This amp the name of the file to which the information of this main project i to be saved Description of each category 1 File The detailed information on files is displayed File name Displays the file name of the file to save the information on the
5. Use this category to configure general settings relating to fonts and colors on each panel Figure A 38 Option Dialog Box General Font and Color Category TE Caras al Lann o To Siero and Exit General Font and Color ad Display a External Text Editar ET al fen Lap he i ahi m Lak lige debat color al External Tools a 5 Propel 3 Buil i 1 3 Dh meo Use etal baciaround cher a Python Consola eee He IT iT Ted Editor Siig Merl ore na lear att oF Linclyts Cale coche Cahit hag hier E Teer 5 Umer iarraiki Coheed va hue Brest Selected dom Cobrz 2 Dipler ecsquple ASCO sod 0173 3 Font aatimgz dor dd editor Font 4 ngiri al Export Gratialion Salina Function buttons E hitializa Al Serinex Leth Seno foo He The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Color options area Use this area to configure the colors a Setting place area Select a location from the list for which the color will be specified The relationships between the list items and default color settings are as follows Item Example Description DefaultNote SaQhbe e Font color Black The standard display color in all win dows and panels Background color White Warning AaBhGr Font color Blue Warning messages are displayed in a thi
6. Edit menu Memory Mapping Profiler panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive to Edit menu in the Memory Mapping Profiler panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected contents in the Build options about the selected memory map ping area or Details of the selected memory mapping area to the clip board Delete Deletes the memory mapping selected in the Profiled memory mapping list area Note that lt Latest result of profiling gt cannot be deleted Select All Selects all data displayed in the Build options about the selected memory mapping area or Details of the selected memory mapping area Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Find in Files tab target Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab target Context menu Copy Copies the selected contents in the Build options about the selected memory map ping area or Details of the selected memory mapping area to the clip board Delete Deletes the memory mapping selected in the Profiled memory mapping list area Note that lt Latest result of profiling gt cannot be deleted Select All Selects all data displayed in the Build options about the selected memory mapping area or Details of the selected memory mapping area R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 179 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Column Chooser dialog box
7. J Default ds le 1 ib Library Gererstor Completed adosctl c intpre c resetore c somple c sbrk c weckibl c min c Daf aul Bui disse le abs Defaul Bui ld eene le mol Renesas Optimizing Linker Completed eS Build anded Error 0 Terninsi0Hsanele DefanltBui ld J T Ended Success 2 Projects Failed 0 Projects soccx xom xx 20x sor xx xx s E LAIL Messages Build Tool Rapid Suid Figure 2 79 Build Execution Results Rapid Build Afr Th Gl Def aultSui ld le sbs Default Sui ld sample mot Renesas Ort ialzing Linker Goweleted EdF Al Messages Build Tool Remark 1 The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed Remark 2 When a file name or line number can be obtained from the output messages if you double click on the message you can jump to the relevant line in the file Remark 3 If you press the F1 key when the cursor is on a line displaying the warning or error message you can display the help related to that line s message Files generated by the build tool appear under the Build tool generated files node on the Project Tree panel R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 76 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 80 Build Tool Generated Files Project Tree A LE ASFSGINACIFB Microcontroller A CO RAX Build Tool 1 RX Simulator Debug Tool S El Build tool generated files ted sample abs mot sample meat Fek sa
8. Default Memo Number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 153 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Microcontroller Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on microcontrollers configured in the project categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Microcontroller Information 3 IOR Display Type RH850 4 Notes Figure A 13 Property Panel Microcontroller Information Tab j ROFSGSNACKFE Property Eee 4 File Information File mame PoP Sha NALE E common ml Absolute path D Program Files Fa Electronice Microcontroller information al TOC ir l ST Nan f DFSG HAC ce I Micknarne RAAN File version WT 00 50 On chip ROM size EBytez 66 Inechip RAM size Bytes 19107 Hotes Filename This amp the file name of ihis device file Microcontroller Information Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file is shown File name Displays device file name Default Device file name How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the device file
9. Warning AaBhcr Character color Blue Warning for the operation Background Normal color color R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 170 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Message type Example Default Description Error message Character color Fatal error or operation disabled because of an error in operation Background color This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the output message is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the message Edi tor panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displayed You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when building b Display of help Displays the help with regard to the displayed message or the message at the current caret by selecting Help for Message in the context menu or pressing F1 key while the caret is in the line where the warning message or the error message is displayed c Save of log The contents displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Output tab name As from File menu and opens the Save As dialog box messages on the tab that is not selected will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select tabs that messages are output from Tabs that are displayed are as follows Tab Name Description Build Tool Displays the messages output
10. and displayed lt 2 gt When the target project type is a debug dedicated project This item is invalid Remark 1 Use one of the following methods to select multiple rows Left click the mouse with pressing the Ctrl key Left click the mouse with pressing the Shift key Drag the mouse to select a range of rows Pressing the space key while a row is selected switches the selected non selected state of the check box Remark 2 Clicking on the header of each column sorts the entries in ascending order by default Clicking on the same header again sorts the entries in the reverse order Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box and runs builds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the builds is displayed on the Output panel After the builds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Rebuild Closes this dialog box and runs rebuilds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the rebuilds is displayed on the Ouiput panel After the rebuilds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Closes this dialog box and deletes the files which are built in the respective build modes set for the sele
11. lt 2 gt List of microcontrollers Select a microcontroller The microcontrollers that correspond to the microcontroller type selected in Microcontroller are listed and categorized by their nicknames The following information on the selected microcontroller that is used in the project is shown in the box at right Product Name On chip ROM size Kbytes RX Internal ROM size Kbytes RH850 RL78 On chip RAM size Bytes RX Internal RAM size Bytes RH850 RL78 Additional InformationNote Note Other information appears only when present lt 3 gt Button Displays the CS Update Manager window When the microcontroller to be used does not appear in the list you can search for the microcontroller via the network Caution This button is only enabled when this product is installed using the installer lt is disabled when a packaged item is being used Remark When the selection violates any restriction the following messages are shown Message Description Select the device Because no device is selected for example a device category is selected it is not possible to determine the project type 3 Select session Select the session used in the new project from the drop down list Only the sessions in the HEW project that are linked to the target will appear in the drop down list Remark This item is displayed only when the HEW project is converted and there are multiple sessions in it 4
12. vecttbl asm For defining the interrupt vector table R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 CENESAS Page 118 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Application for Multi core CC RH Select this to create an application project for multi core by using build tool CC RH provided by CS Caution This item is displayed only when microcontrollers for RH850 multi core are selected in the Using microcontroller area Remark The following start up source files are generated in the project folder These files are also registered in the project tree File Name Description cstartm asm For defining the start up routine for each application iodefine h For defining I O registers main c For defining the empty main function Library CC RH CC RX CC RL Select this to generate a library file for a user library by using the build tool provided by CS Debug Only Select this to debug a load module file or hex file generated with a build tool other than the one provided by CS i e creates a debug dedicated project See E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on how to create and use the debug dedicated proj ect 4 Project Creation area Set the project to create a Project name Directly enter the name of the project to create The entered project name is followed by the extension mtpj and this forms the project file name Remark When the subproject is created the entered project name
13. Build You can configure optimization and other build options in the CS panels enabling you to create efficient load module files and a library file Remark It is also possible to link to an external build tool and use it instead of the build tool provided by CS see E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Debug You can display your debugging tool s connection settings and debugging information in CS panels There are also many methods for executing programs enabling you to debug your programs efficiently Analysis You can analyze information while the program is executing and display information about the functions and vari ables Updates Communicate with the update server to get the latest version of this product R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 7 of 283 Aug 01 2014 1 GENERAL CS V3 00 00 1 GENERAL 1 3 System Configuration Below is shown an example of the system configuration Figure 1 1 System Configuration Host machine CS Design tools Build tools etc Supported target environments Simulator Supported target environments Emulator SI Remark The emulator that can be connected differs depending on the microcontroller used in the project See CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug Tool for details R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 8 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 1 GENERAL 1 4 Operating Environment Below are the system requirements for thi
14. Default The absolute path of the device file How to change Changes not allowed 2 Microcontroller Information The detailed information on microcontrollers is displayed and their configuration can be changed Microcontroller name Displays microcontrollers to use in the project or the subproject Default Microcontrollers used in the main project or the subproject How to Changes not allowed change Nickname Displays the nickname of the microcontroller to use Default The nickname of the microcontroller to use How to Changes not allowed change R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 154 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE File version Displays the device file version of the microcontroller to use Default The device file version of the microcontroller to use How to Changes not allowed change Bank size KBytes Displays the bank size of the microcontroller being used in Kbytes as a decimal num ber Note that this property is only shown for microcontrollers with a memory bank Default The bank size recorded in your microcontroller s device file How to Changes not allowed change Internal ROM size Displays internal ROM size KBytes of the microcontroller to use in decimal number KBytes Default Internal ROM size of the microcontroller to use How to Changes not allowed change Internal RAM size Displays internal
15. Error message Warning message Y different icons in accord with the different types of message Pi Normal message Number Displays the message number Message Displays the message File Displays the file name without any path of the target that the message indicates The absolute path will be shown in the tooltip Line Displays the line number of the target that the message indicates Project Displays the project file name without any path of the target that the message indi cates The absolute path will be shown in the tooltip R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 173 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE The error information displayed in this area will be deleted when one of the following events occurs When the target file has been built without outputting the error or warning When the target file has been non build target When the target file or subproject has been removed from the project When the build mode of the target project has been changed When the target project has been cleaned This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the error information is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the error informa tion Editor panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displayed You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when building b Display of
16. Function buttons Button Function OK Changes the selected toolbar to the specified name and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 243 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Customize Keyboard dialog box This dialog box is used to assign shortcut keys to the various commands Figure A 57 Customize Keyboard Dialog Box Add New Subproject Add Mew Watch dd Subprojert Adv ar Currently assigned to unassigned Description 3 Adds a fle to a project Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog box click the Keyboard button Description of each area 1 Specify a Command area a Categories Display a list of the categories of commands provided by CS b Commands Display a list of the commands belonging to the category selected under Categories and their associated icons if any If All Commands is selected under Categories then all commands provided by CS appear with their asso ciated icons if any R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 244 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Specify a Shortcut area This area displays the default shortcut key currently assigned to th
17. Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the project file of the selected project with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Displays the Windows Explorer menu corresponding to the project file for the selected project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 134 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects and files to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to a project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to a project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to a project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the cate gory name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set Selected project Active Project Sets the selected project to an active project Save Project and Develop ment Tools as Package Saves a set of the project and thi
18. Save Layout 2 Saves the docking layout in slot 2 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 2 Save Layout 3 Saves the docking layout in slot 3 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 3 Save Layout 4 Saves the docking layout in slot 4 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 4 Restore Layout 1 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 1 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore Layout 2 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 2 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore Layout 3 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 3 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Restore Layout 4 Restores a saved docking layout This command restores the layout saved via the Save Layout 4 If no layout has been saved to this slot the layout from the first startup is restored Reset Layout Returns all settings relating to the layout of the Main window docking pan els to their default values Remark The layout is saved and restored in each of the following three states Before loading a project When a project is loaded and before a debug tool is connected Whe
19. The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel after selecting a file open the message dialog box by selecting Change Extension from the context menu And then click the Yes button in the dialog box Select the property corresponding with this dialog box on the Property panel and then click the button In the Build Mode Settings dialog box select a build mode to be duplicated from Build mode list and then click the Duplicate button Description of each area 1 String area Input characters in one line By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected to this area You cannot start a new line Remark Up to 32767 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Message Description More than maximum number of restriction in the The numbers of input characters property that called this dialog box characters exceeds the maximum number of cannot be specified restriction in the property that called this dialog box a Button The placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from are displayed in a popup ascending order If a placeholder is selected the string will be surrounded with percentage signs and displayed in String
20. This dialog box is used to sort show hide the columns displayed on the Memory Mapping Profiler panel If the display in the panel has been customized all of those customizations can be returned to the default state in this dialog box Figure A 25 Column Chooser Dialog Box w Type Sie Bytes Function buttons Close The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Memory Mapping Profiler panel click the 4 button Description of each area 1 Item list area This area displays a list of all columns that can be displayed on the Memory Mapping Profiler panel The display order of the columns in this list and the state of check boxes are the same as the current sort order and visible hidden status in the panel This area has the following functions Rearrange the columns on the Memory Mapping Profiler panel The columns displayed on the panel can be rearranged with the following method Drag the column displayed in this dialog box and drop it in the Details of the selected memory mapping area on the panel Specify display or non display for columns on the Memory Mapping Profiler panel The columns to be displayed on the panel can be set with either of the following methods Select the check box of a column displayed in this dialog box Drag a column displayed in this dialog box and drop it in the Details of
21. Blue Background color Default color in the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel SFR panel Watch panel Values forcibly modified by the user are displayed in this color in the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Vari ables panel SFR panel Watch panel Current PC Breakpoint Update periodic AaBbCe Font color Black Background color Font color LightOrange Black Background color Font color Background color SalmonPink Pink Default color The row with the current PC position is displayed in this color in the Editor panel The line at which a break point is set is displayed in this color in the Editor panel Areas configured for real time display updates are shown in this color in the Memory panel and Watch panel Read or fetch AABbCe Font color Default color Background color LightGreen Locations that have been read or fetched are displayed in this color in the Trace panel IECUBE Simulator Font color Default color Background color Orange Locations that have been written are displayed in this color in the Trace panel IECUBE Simulator Read and write AaBbCec Font color Default color Background color LightSkyBlue Locations that have been read and writ ten are displayed in this color in the Trace panel IECUBE Simulator Font color Background color White LightGra
22. Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CS for Tool name does not exist R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 47 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 11 Convert a PM project into a CS project You can convert a PM project into a CS project Select Open Project from the Project menu with CS and then select a workspace file prw or project file prj When opening from a PM workspace file prw When opening from a PM project file prj 1 When opening from a PM workspace file prw a Select the project for conversion settings When a PM workspace file is selected the Project Convert Setting dialog box will open aie 2 36 Project Convert Pound HAA Box Toa can corsar poa pral for da CS A Greupi rect SO he AA Fo L i bey 20d ohea ed e eee St Ber Sekei the projects rom the left ist bo aed change the semi ae UF project several projects wit Ctl besos pos can change thoes projecte meinga 115008 HA rupt When poa presa the JOR bution withoe chaeging pay seti ga the pea projects ME reade in the sare a ae place oe the seloci d projecto sed the old projects se backuped in ag ottechenee bolder ha pregeaciW h pa eer E High parkara ade Emija el F Wael please be Sot la dileal e de bo aeh project The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings
23. R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 112 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Learn About CS area a Learn About CS Click the button to show a tutorial aimed at improving your understanding of CS 2 Create New Project area a Create New Project Click the button to open the Create Project dialog box in order to create a new CS project file 3 Create New Multi core Project area a Create New Multi core Project Click the button to open the Create Project dialog box in order to create a new boot loader project and a a new application project for multi core Remark This area is minimized by default click to resize the area 4 Open Existing Project area a Recently Project This area displays up to four of the most recently used project file names project names b Favorite project This area displays up to four of the project file names project names in your favorites c Open Existing Project Click the button to open the Open Project dialog box in order to open an existing CS project file with mtpj extension 5 Open Existing e2 studio CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project area a Open Existing e2 studio CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project Click the button to open the Open Project dialog box in order to open an existing e studio project file
24. Select a file and then press the Enter key Toolbar Sorts files and Category nodes in Project tree area in order of their names Ascending order Descending order Ascending order Sorts files other than the dependency files and Category nodes in Project tree area in order of the user definition default Display order is changed by dragging and dropping the file and Category node Refreshes the state of highlighting for files read only files non existent files and overlay icons R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 133 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Copies the selected file or Category node to the clip board While editing the file name or the category name the characters of the selection are copied to the clip board Note that this menu is only enabled when the file other than the dependency files or the Category node is selected Inserts the contents of the clip board to the root of the node that is selected on the Project Tree While editing the file name or the category name insert the contents of the clip board Note that this menu is only enabled when the file or the Category node exists If a project with the same contents is already on the clipboard however then if mul tiple files or Category nodes are selected and the build tool is running then it will be invalid Rename You can rename th
25. Caution This button is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 163 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 L ENESAS Page 164 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Figure A 18 Text Edit Dialog Box When Caller Supports Placeholders Placeholder Placeholder Value Deser plan Cwork DebugOnly Abcoalite path of lhe active propect folder 2 SeiveProeetlame Oeburlnk Seve project name Built MedeNemne OetaultBuikd Build mode name PlainPrejeetDir Clerk DebugOnk Absolute palh of the main project folder ManProjctMeme OeburOnly Mam project name ri Cos ee Figure A 19 Text Edit Dialog Box When Caller Does Not Support Placeholders E Text Edit a Text Function
26. Option The information for individual compile options is output in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CS file name Option Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user cre ated build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that HEW pro vides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CS for Tool name does not exist Options to change Build mode If an option that has been set in a HEW project and has been changed to use in a CS project option that the range the parameter can be specified has been changed and option that has been changed by upgrading the compiler package exists the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CS Option of HEW project gt Option or CS project The information for individual compile options is output in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CS file name Opkeion Of HEW project gt Option of CSF project Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user cre ated build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that HEW pro vides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not
27. The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add and change a build mode is shown below Create a new build mode Change the build mode R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 269 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 1 Create a new build mode Creating a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure E 20 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Bulld Mode Settings selected build mode Burid mode list Detalle Select the build mode to be duplicated from Build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog box will open Figure E 21 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input Sir rig Build Mode In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects including projects other than a debug dedicated project which currently belong to the project Figure E 22 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode Bulld Mode Settings Ta selected build mode Buildiade2 Apply to All Burid mode list Sacados Duplicate
28. b Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 48 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Propet Serer Petey Mere cd Taare 5 a aa ga UF project ci UR rea pa Mew mierea OB projects 3 project A Flaca CMMorkla pla Fte kir Base a Esclusa the pot corpo on a ete corrosion ES emilio aa Prec seba Hra merei Mirandilla He Tatin ina lay e lack monpcorinal lar ipei E Me ATAGAN a Product Mane ASFTDOCA i Glance D iens FOH ere Phat 1 E REFA H E ASFIOI TA Hp ASF Aye p E REFS EE RSF Ase a AP E e e project Empty Appicaice CC ALI oUt pat Fisa Cirk a pla FH ir E briu dhe prat emen ten iia rbn converse After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Remark 1 When the main project is selected the New microcontroller area and Kind of project in the New project area will be invalid R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 49 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Remark 2 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the conver sion the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved However the main project is selected this item wil
29. ignated condition Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 197 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CS environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 34 Option Dialog Box caj Sbartup ard Exit 1 2 Display al Extra Tel Ed or 3 Font and Calo al Extermal Tools 5 Propel 3 Build 3 Debug al Python Consola E Tesi Editor Dp Updri 2 hit 3 User vienna iar Function buttons E hitialos Al Settiner The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Category selection area Cusco Help Lo Select the items to configure from the following categories Category General Startup and Exit category General Display category Description Configure startup and shutdown Configure messages from the application General External Text Editor category Configure the external text editor General Font and Color category General External Tools category General Project category Configure the fonts and colors shown on each panel Configure the star
30. lt gt will be replaced by under scores _ When the build mode names have 110 or more characters they are rounded to 110 characters If there is another build mode with the same name after conversion then the _n n 1 2 will be appended to the build mode name Remark 5 If nesting is to a depth of 20 or more categories the 20th stage and deeper stages are ignored Files in such categories are added to the 20th category When the category names have 200 or more characters they are rounded to 200 characters R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 35 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Remark 6 The following e studio and build tool versions are supported for conversion e studio V 2 0 0 16 or higher and CC RX V1 00 00 or higher The latest version of the compiler package installed on your com puter is set as the version of your build tool Remark 7 The conversion result is output to a file as project convert information The project convert information file name is ProjectConvertinformation_projectname txt The project convert information file is output to the project folder The project convert information file is displayed under the File node on the Project Tree panel The output format of the project convert information file is shown below 1 Time and date on which a project was converted 2 lt IDE version gt CS IDE Version Date 3 lt Compiler package version gt Compile
31. with rcpc extension CubeSuite project file with cspj extension HEW workspace file with hws exten sion HEW project file with hwp extension PM workspace file with prw extension PM project file with prj extension 6 Open Sample Project area a Open Sample Project Load a sample project file with mtpj extension provided by CS Select the Microcontroller tab then select a sample project from the list Next click the oo button to open the Browse For Folder dialog box and specify a folder to which to copy the sample project After copying the sample to the specified folder the sample project is loaded 7 Button Minimizes the area Only the title text and minimize buttons will be shown Restores a minimized area R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 113 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Create Project dialog box This dialog box is used to create new projects or subprojects Caution A subproject cannot be added to another subproject Figure A 3 Create Project Dialog Box Specs From Other Area than Create New Multi core Project On Start Panel 1 Lema meroconirmoller E Sean h menmcenimilar Licda la Sy AGE peel O de a chp H TEE he E IS On chip ROM aries HET 2 tipin Ad ional s EANA EGLE ior hiems Peke FLOPI de AHA E PSFSEINACFPCI Opie Me PSFSEIHA OLEA ipl E FAFGCIM ACES LES Son Mi FSF SRINAG LE i Won 3 Kiri of proyect A
32. CENESAS C 7 D ma Cp lt Q 5 C V CS V3 00 00 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Project Operation Target Device RL78 Family RX Family RH850 Family All information contained in these materials including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics www renesas com Rev 1 00 2014 08 10 11 12 Notice Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information inclu
33. Create New Multi core Project area on the Start panel a Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project Select this check box when reusing the file composition of the existing project to create a new project The check box is unchecked by default The category of the file can be also reused b Project to be passed Designate the name of the source project when diverting the file composition of the existing project to create a new project Designate the name of the source project by directly entering it with absolute path or selecting with the Open Project dialog box after pressing the Browse button The last designated location is shown in the box C Users User name Documents is the default location when the file is created for the first time This field is enabled only when the Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project check box is checked Caution You cannot designate the e studio CubeSuite HEW or PM project file Remark 1 Up to 259 characters can be entered Remark 2 When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown Message Description File name with the path is too long The file name with the path is more than 259 char Shorten within 259 characters acters The divert project does not exist The path includes a nonexistent folder or the specified project file cannot be found The divert project name is invalid Enter The fi
34. Download File Settings tab on the Property panel of the debug tool source files are not added to the project tree R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 219 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Enable Break Sound Beeps when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break d 4 Buttons Does not beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or soft ware break default Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 220 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Python Console category Use this category to configure general setting relating to the Python console Figure A 45 Option Dialog Box General Python Console Category P Tanara a p 5 Startup and Exit General Python Corn le 3d Display 1
35. Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and any subproject does not exist Close Project Closes the current project Changes the current project or file to the new one If they have not saved confirm the user whether to save them Save Project Saves the configuration information of the current project to the project file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box to save the configuration information of the current project to the project file with another name R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 107 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Remove from Project Removes the selected project or subproject from the project The subproject files or the file themselves are not deleted from the file sys tem Save Project and Development Saves a set of the project and this product by copying them in a folder Tools as Package e Build The Build menu shows menu items for the build process Build Project Runs a build of the project A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild of the project A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Runs a clean of the project A clean of a subproje
36. On chip ROM size Kbytes RX Internal ROM size Kbytes RH850 RL78 On chip RAM size Bytes RX Internal RAM size Bytes RH850 RL78 Additional InformationNote Note Other information appears only when present c Button Displays the CS Update Manager window When the microcontroller to be used does not appear in the list you can search for the micro controller via the network Caution This button is only enabled when this product is installed using the installer It is disabled when a packaged item is being used 3 Kind of project Select the project type to create on Kind of project You can select the item below Caution Only Boot Loader for Multi core CC RH can be selected when this dialog box is opened from the Create New Multi core Project area on the Start panel Application CC RH CC RX CC RL Select this to generate the load module file and hex file from C source files by using the build tool provided by CS The generated file will be the debug target Caution This item is not displayed when microcontrollers for RH850 multi core are selected in the Using microcontroller area Remark 1 If the build tool is CC RH the following start up source files are generated in the project folder These files are also registered in the project tree R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 116 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE File Name Description cstart a
37. Order dialog box will open Figure 2 61 Link Order Dialog Box brary kb brayl bb israry03 bb The names of the following files are listed in File in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files which are generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproject Object module files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Library files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Remark The default order is the order that the files are added to the project Object module files generated from newly added source files and newly added object module files are added after the last object module file in the list Newly added library files are added to the end of the list R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 67 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Change the file display order By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker Change the file display order by one of the following procedures Move the file name by using the Up and Down buttons Drag and drop the file name Use a link order specification file Remark You can use a link order specification file to change the display order on a file basis The procedures for performing this operation are described below a Generate a l
38. Release Build are the build modes that e studio provides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CS for Tool name does not exist R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 36 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Number Description 5 Options to change Build mode If an option that has been set in an e studio project and has been changed to use in a CS project option that the range the parameter can be specified has been changed and option that has been changed by upgrading the compiler package exists the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CS Option of e studio project gt Option of CS project Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user cre ated build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that e studio provides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CS for Tool name does not exist R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 37 of 283 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 9 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CS project You can convert a CubeSuite project into a CS project Select O
39. Text a Placeholder This area displays the placeholder b Value The string is displayed after replacement with the placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Function OK Reflects the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 166 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path or file name including the path Figure A 20 Path Edit Dialog Box When Editing Path Path ilne path per one lime 5 Browse U Permit non existent path Include subfolders automatically Placeholder Placeholaer vale Description 2 AciveProjectDr Cworkisample Absolute path of the active project folder AcineProjecthome sample Actie project mare Build Mode Marne Detou lt Build Build mode mams PlainProectDir aort sampe Absolute path of the main project folder T Figure A 21 Path Edit Dialog Box When Editing File Name Includi
40. When Update Dependencies of active project is selected from the Build menu Remark 1 The display of dependency files is valid only when the Show dependency files in project tree check box in the General Build category of the Option dialog box is selected Remark 2 Information on the dependency files displayed on the project tree is not saved in the project file Caution 1 When checking for dependences on include files CS does not support cases of include files to which conditional statements such as if apply or for which the include directive is commented out Therefore there is a case where this product regards an include file unnecessary for a build as a neces sary file In the example below header1 h and header5 h are judged as required for build if 0 include headerl h Dependence relationship judged to exist else l gero 7 include header2 h Dependence relationship to exist tendif define AAA ifdef AAA include header3 h Dependence relationship to exist else include header4 h Dependence relationship to exist tendif Es include header5 h Dependence relationship judged to exist 7 Caution 2 When checking for dependences on include files CS does not support include statements that follow comments or comment marks that are on the same line Therefore there is a case where this product regards an include file necessary for a build as a unneces sary file In the example
41. au Font mae J Enaite auto indentation Los spaces au tabs External lots Project ci elie marks Enable lives thb lor Sure 2 Eisi General 1 Cita Enas persas coloring Erabila ipai ed tong a Python Consola r Al Teri Edir a Eni pode ofl beaut T Enable k ercodre si o deteci nn GF Uplate Estar cred rl eed fhe Parpi 590 rela Ha Pde pa hint 3 Weer Fiare EACAN oa Hessen Bur oped eck 3 Ctagara Enis fine highlight for PL Erabls took rich Ersbde lina highlight for bread ryers Lips mridos recicla 4 tratiafira Sattiras Function buttons E hitializa Al Serinex 0k finos opyo Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Spacing Use this area to configure the spacing related settings in the text editor a Enable auto indentation Code is intelligently indented depending on the code being typed in the text editor E g Inside a function or not or coding a loop default Code is not indented depending on the code being typed in the text editor b Use spaces as tabs When you press the Tab key in the text editor a group of space characters is inserted equal to the width of a tab When you press the Tab key in the text editor the tab character is inserted default c Show whitespa
42. gt Rapid Build tab Figure E 27 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build Output ES s Start build all loo mao a Mia xc soc xx Sasmssssss Hart build sub DebugOnly DefsuliBuild al aime mine Build endadlErrorc0 Warning 0 sub Bebus inly Gefaulk Build J Hart build DebucDnly CefsultSui ld a AAS ARE Program Mebrterence Ut ity Version KAS RAA l Cr work DesugOn ly rales Gopyriehd 0 MAM AA AAAS AA All rights reserved al gt Build endediErrar 0 Warning 0 MOsbus nl y DefaultBui ld 33333555 EndediSumcessi Projects Faileadill Projecte box cox ce dla a xe 3x R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 273 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 28 Build Execution Results Rapid Build cei marek Debo l eke ome rie mp lmi a na 3 Po ee era T AA BOR Program halrdenanca UL i Marion AAA al Copyright C AAA MA A All rights reserved EOF Remark The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed E 5 1 Runa build The command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 1 Setting the command when running a build This allows you to run a build of only updated files The commands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see E 4 3 Set the target project for a build ca
43. ra EN rs PEA O ql bo rend qa betes Bee pr e ar ed Vr A aa tel Eo re ar Oh onde Saar peace niin Di he poesia ira El ARI A a Een cca Ups rra Prep rl Marroc ert a cog p ey ae rr Se elec fhe de raed peed be A ri a ba pee Ea TES bdi gra prp ibe dl pe Rota Ri m ul I et ee ntti Pg cc He All A amet hp al vam The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Select Windows Start gt gt Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CS gt gt CS for CC RX RH850 Remark In Windows 8 or Windows 8 1 double click on CS for CC RX RH850 on the start screen R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 100 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area Remark Parts of the menus and buttons are displayed only when the corresponding plug ins are enabled 1 Menu bar This displays common menus Contents of each menu can be customized in User Setting dialog box a File The File menu displays file related menu commands Display a cascading menu of items to create Create New Project Closes the current project and open the Create Project dialog box in order to create a new project If the currently open project or its files have been modified then the pro gram will ask if you would like to save your changes Create New File Creates a new blank file ready for editing
44. 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 6503 0 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd Room 1709 Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100191 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 301 Tower A Central Towers 555 Langao Road Putuo District Shanghai P R China 200333 Tel 86 21 2226 0888 Fax 86 21 2226 0999 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2265 6688 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 13F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei 10543 Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 80 Bendemeer Road Unit 06 02 Hyflux Innovation Centre Singapore 339949 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6213 0300 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 12F 234 Teheran ro Gangnam Ku Seoul 135 920 Korea Te
45. A A A ie Lhe saye pese od de ate tE io ay dr dea pa open 4 Higb perkaregece Embuddod rias bsp projezl plesse bo dade le eee de der be meh poi The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings b Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items Figure 2 41 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Project Is Selected Frota Hra mereri Parca a Pise Pec cece ied bar E o rice ise E 313 RON 16KB a Product Here ASF TEA hi eae 3 itens R N ero li 1 REF TOOTA Zp E REFONTA ZA pr E REF IODA Zo ean N REFON E REFS a Empty ApebenioelCC AL merh Fisa ork ae Tpi EH kir fet Brip ha pyd carros on iha riri corrvarsice After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 51 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Remark 1 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the conver sion the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved Remark 2 See Project Convert Setting dialog box for details about each setting item c Convert the CS project The PM project is
46. Button Duplicate Duplicates the selected build mode The Character String Input dialog box opens And the build mode is duplicated with the name entered in the dialog box and added to the main project and all the subprojects in the currently opening project When the build mode with mark does not exist in the main project or subproject and duplicate the build mode DefaultBuild will be duplicated Up to 20 build modes can be added R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 188 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 Delete Deletes the selected build mode Note that DefaultBuild cannot be A WINDOW REFERENCE deleted If the currently set build mode is deleted DefaultBuild is set Rename Caution Remark 1 Remark 2 Input dialog box Renames the selected build mode Rename the build mode with entered name in the opening the Character String When duplicating or renaming the build mode the existing build mode name cannot be used Up to 127 characters can be specified as a build mode name When the input violates any restric tion the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message A build mode with the same name already exists Description The entered build mode name already exists More than 127 characters cannot be specified Build mode name is too long more than 128 characters The build mode name is invalid The following characters cannot be used 1
47. Clean Project Item Build Sq Build Project F7 Rebuild Project Shift F7 Al Rapid Build DA Update Dependencies E Build sample HI Rebuild sample LW Clean sample 22 Update Dependencies of sample Set Link Order of sample my Stop Build Ctrl F Build Mode Settings 1 Batch Build Ty Build Option List 2 When running a clean of the active project Select the project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure 2 89 Clean active project Item Project AE R5F563NACx E Build sample Ra CC RX Build q Rebuild sample EF RX Simulatg_ 3 m File pa sf Open Folder with Explorer El Windows Explorer Menu Add fs Set sample as Active Project Save Project and Development Tools as Package Ex Paste Ctri W am Rename Fz E Property R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 83 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Save the Project File The project s settings information is saved to the project file mtpj Select the File or Project menu gt gt Save Project When there is a change in the project the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 90 Message Dialog Box Question Q0201002 Project may have been changed by another program Gwernerite same tes tdo atthe To continue with the operation click the Yes button on the dialog box The project file is overwritten with the current sett
48. Clear the window when the active project is changed Clears the window when the active project is changed default Does not clear the window when the active project is changed Remark This item can be set or referred by using CS Python property common ConsoleClear 5 Display the results of executing CS Python function Displays the results of executing a CS Python function in the Python console default Does not display the results of executing a CS Python function in the Python console Remark This item can be set or referred by using CS Python property common ViewOutput Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 222 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Text Editor category Use this category to configure general settings relating to the text editor Figure A 46 Option Dialog Box General Text Editor Category TE Tanara AS Fe Startup and Exil General Text Edir 1 Eske mi beet come a Lie
49. Commands executed in the project building property in the Build category in the Property panel Build can run a build of only updated files Note gt See E 5 1 Run a build Rebuild Executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel and then executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the category same as above Rebuild can run a build of all build target filesNote gt See E 5 2 Run a rebuild Executes the command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel oo can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build ote gt See E 5 3 Run a clean Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with the change of the build setting gt See E 5 4 Run a rapid build Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has gt See E 5 5 Run a batch build Note It is assumed that a proper command has been set in the Property panel see E 4 1 Set the com mands 2 Displaying execution results The execution results of the build standard output and standard error from the external build tool used are dis played in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build gt All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build
50. Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Plug in Setting Description of each area 1 Tab selection area By selecting a tab the plug ins displayed in the plug in list area are switched This dialog box has the following tabs Basic Function tab Additional Function tab 2 Plug in list area Select the plug ins read when this product is started with check boxes For details of displayed items setting method see the description of each tab R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 230 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 231 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Basic Function tab This tab is used to set the build tool and debug tool plug ins to be read in when this product is started Figure A 50 Plug in Manager Dialog Box Basic Function Tab Plug in Manager Checked plur re are losded st the 54 sdart up sebirags are enabled of Hae next start up fo can never uncheck 4 check box of the argot plan thet is requred by e Cor Also on the Basic cheackbowes of the ple ndo e taest mecrocortroller ol the Function tsb i is recommended that the
51. Dialog Box General Startup and Exit Category Cheneral Sdertug and Exot 1 Omen the repni Adeice disba bos at Gii pr tp 2 F Open the Splash window at C startup 3 at PF Lead iba Laat Bitci af Cot laua 4 ae al Phon Conros A Tesi Editor F Upc hit 3 User Fiaa 5 Fritialize Sallinge Function buttons E hitializa Al Serinex o DK Cael fepk Heb The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Open the One point Advice dialog box at CS startup Shows the One Point Advice dialog box on startup default Does not show the One Point Advice dialog box on startup 2 Open the Splash window at CS startup Shows the Splash window on startup default F Does not show the Splash window on startup 3 Load the last project at CS startup Automatically loads the last project on startup default Does not automatically load the last project on startup 4 Reduce startup time by enabling rapid startup Reduces startup time by enabling rapid startup default Disables the rapid start feature R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 200 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Remark See 2 11 1 Use rapid start for details about the rapid start Caution This item is
52. ENESAS Page 171 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 Save Output tab name As A WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the currently selecting tab in the designated text file txt see c Save of log Note that this operation is invalid while user program is executed Edit menu Output panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive to Edit menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected characters to the clip board Select All Selects all the messages displayed on the panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Find tab target Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab target Context menu Copy Copies the selected characters to the clip board Select All Clear Selects all the messages displayed on the panel Deletes all the messages displayed on the panel Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and col umn Jump to Previous Message Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the previous message file and line Jump to Next Message Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the next message file and line Help for Message R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 Displays the help with regard to the displayed message or the message at the cur
53. FUNCTIONS Description Start CS without displaying the Main window and without loading any of the specified plugins in the Plugins folder If this is specified together with the np or lp option then this option will take precedence When a plugin is specified together with the lpall option the option specified backward of the command line will take precedence If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end plug in optionA plug Specify an option for the plug in see 3 Plug in Options in parameter project file name Start CS without displaying the Main window with the specified project file loaded Remark 1 When the Ip pall np or npall option is specified the settings of the Plug in Manager dia log box are not changed Remark 2 While CS is running press the Ctrl C keys to forcibly terminate CS The results of execution are output to the command prompt Figure 2 105 Command Prompt If Build ls Executed with CubeSuite exe a CF indows systemS2 cmdlexe x LlLatornat ion Eii iAd lool AE A pebuild all Thouraday July 31 2014 II PAS 2 InfornationJ1Build Tool Start buald rs sample Default Builds lafornation 1Biild Tool Sdhectc intpegc resetperg_c pe_sanple c sbrk c o LiInfornation Buald Tool Default Builds es sanple abs DefaultMuildr x_sample mol Informat ion Build Tool Renesas Optimizing Link
54. Fatal error Processing terminated Suspended due to fatal error A M Information Informational message Check the message and continue the process E Q Choice This type of message IS displayed when a choice is necessary in order to carry on with the next operation It performs the selected action ri W Warning Warning message Check the message and continue the process Direct message type Cause only appears when there are details for the message output Refer to the message displayed in Direct message type Cause and its online help if you are unable to identify the cause of the issue from the message output and its online help Remark The message types may differ for example the type of the message output may be a warning while the direct cause is a fatal error Example Message W0240001 Could not move to the definition location of the symbol Specify the symbol Direct Warning Cause Could not move E0220005 2 Detailed display area This area displays the information only when there is detailed information in the output message To display this area click Detail button the area is not displayed as default a Contents of display The details of the output message are displayed in tree view categorized by items edit not allowed Description Error Output error message is shown Error Process The function that the error occurred and the function group that treated the error are listed by each message st
55. Framework Version Contents Windows information Application Information Product Name Package Version Version Assembly Version Sales AreaNote 1 Product License Additional InformationNote 1 Execution Place Memory Usage Information of this product Plug in InformationNote 2 Present Project InformationNote 4 Module name VersionNote 3 Note 3 Assembly Version DLL file nameNote 3 URL Note 1 Main Project Information Subproject Information Each plug in information for this product in use This shows the absolute path of the project file the absolute path including the mtpj file name for main projects and the absolute path including the mtsp file name for subprojects Microcontroller Information The following item to the specified microcontroller information Device name Device file name List of version Build Tool Information Debug Tool Information The following out of the set build tool plug in informa tionNote 5 Build tool name Version of the build tool plug in Version of the compiler package to use ote 1 The following out of the set debug tool plug in informa tion if the debug tool is not set hide Connected debug tool name Version of the debug tool plug in Version of the debug tool control program The Error Information Which Occurred 6 Note 1 Note 2 Detailed information on
56. New project area Set the project to create a Kind of project Select the project type to create on Kind of project Remark This item will be invalid when a PM workspace is converted and the main project node is selected You can select the item below Application CC RH CC RX CC RL Select this to generate the load module file and hex file from C source files by using the build tool provided by CS The generated file will be the debug target Empty Application CC RH CC RX CC RL Select this to generate the load module file by using build tool provided by CS The generated file will be the debug target Sample startup programs are not generated when the project is created Library CC RH CC RX CC RL Select this to generate a library file for a user library by using the build tool provided by CS R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 124 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Only Select this to debug a load module file or hex file generated with a build tool other than the one provided by CS i e creates a debug dedicated project See E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on how to create and use the debug dedicated project b Project name Directly enter the name of the project to create The entered project name is followed by the extension mtpj and this forms the project file name Remark 1 When the subproject is created the entered project name is followed
57. Object File Symbal The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu Memory Mapping Profiler panel dedicated items Edit menu Memory Mapping Profiler panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Memory Mapping Profiler Description of each area 1 Profiled memory mapping list area The memory mapping information of load modules collected by the build tool of the active project and the memory mapping information saved by the user are displayed The first item displays the memory mapping information collected by the build tool of the active project item name lt Latest result of profiling gt When no information has been collected Uncollected is added to the item name The second and subsequent items display the memory mapping information saved by the user R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 176 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE a Button F Profile Switches between collecting and not collecting the memory mapping informa e tion at build F Profile Collect When this button is ON Collect is added to the button name and the memory mapping information that is output when build of the active project has com pleted will be collected A Opens the Character String Input dialog box in order to save the latest result of profiling collected result of memory mapping inform
58. Project Remove from Project Shift Delete oe Paste Ctri Rename F2 When a project is set as the active project that project is underlined Figure 2 67 Active Project Project Tree 2 Of S LA sample Project Fi RSF553NACXFB Microcontroller A OC RX Build Tool AX Simulator Debug Tool FB Microcontraller Tool EX RX Simulator Debug Tool p File Remark 1 Immediately after creating a project the main project is the active project Remark 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project Caution When a build is started by a button on the tool bar the build is run for the entire project To run a build only for the active project start it from the context menu of the active project 2 6 Add a build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collec tively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add a build mode is shown below 1 Create a new build mode Creating
59. R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 146 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel In this panel the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categorized Also the settings of the selected node can be changed This also shows the type of the Generate Code button clicked in the Code Generator panel and information about the file selected in the Code Generator Preview panel and changes set tings Figure A 10 Property Panel 4 File sample mip Absolute path Cok sample ample tp Moles File mame This amp the name of the tile to which the information of this main project i to be saved The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Dialog boxes opened from the Property panel Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Help menu Property panel dedicated items Context menu How to open Select either one of the Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node file or Category node in Project Tree panel Then select Property in View menu or in the context menu On the Code Generator panel click Generate Code button and then select Property from the View menu or context menu On the Code Generator Preview panel select file and then select Property from the View menu
60. Remark For details of the method of conversion of an old development environment project see the following 2 4 8 Convert an e studio project into a CS project RX 2 4 9 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CS project 2 4 10 Convert a HEW project into a CS project 2 4 11 Convert a PM project into a CS project Figure A 5 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box gee E ee Propet Consert Store fE Errat 2 a Teen pion Project sein A Hrs rracrocontroda fy Preqect Ainara FE He minneti ler SA Search miriocoriral k Ue a IZAR 2 Prethet Meme ASFEZIDIESFF 1 ie HABEAS FF pa Erro PISA ir Efe A ER 7 Cra FAJA 0 4 ES I REF 55 Lips rl EAT ETTET A REF S2 Near Hn Adina intone Proa PLO Soba a REF 158 LH Eee I REF Ee FF E Spa MN ALF Ee FL el E Repa FH Ed par 3 ee eri ee El EJE SYET EA 3 4 Heer propos End of pai Empty Appike CC AA E Proyect ree Proba Placa Cola rd Preset Ba Eise 5 A Bech thee pot compa on fia riri gorrvarsice Function buttons Lo A ta The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Project menu select Open Project to open the Open Project dialog box And then select an e studio CubeSuite HEW PM project or workspace and click the Open button Open Existing e2 studio CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop PM Project area on the Start panel click th
61. Remove an added file from a project To remove a file s that has been added to the debug dedicated project by using the method above select the file s on the project tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu Figure E 12 Remove from Project ltem i File gt El Download files ss sample abe H EE Open Open with Intemal Editor Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Add E Remove from Project Shift Delete ly Copy Gy Paste Ctrl V ap Rename F2 ae Change Extension Property R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 266 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 4 Make Settings for Build Operations Configure CS to execute builds linked to an external build tool e g a compiler assembler other than the build tool pro vided by CS E 4 1 Set the commands You can link to an external build tool by executing the command set here when performing build related operations see E 5 Run a Build on CS The command settings are made with the Build category on the Build Options tab in the Property panel after selecting the Build Tool node of the target debug dedicated project main project or subproject on the project tree Figure E 13 Property Panel Build Options Tab Build Category Property ES A Mone Property El A Bea Build Mode A mmea os IF AAA La a Build Commands execu
62. S610 Bl 176pino 3 Change the microcontroller The current microcontroller is changed to the selected microcontroller Remark 1 The microcontroller can only be changed to another from the same family RH850 RX and RL78 that is compatible with the same build tools Remark 2 When the microcontroller is changed it must be disconnected from the debug tool Remark 3 When the microcontroller is changed the project must be saved Remark 4 After the microcontroller is changed information for the pin configurator design tool code generator design tool and debug tool except for registration of the Watch panel is not maintained R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 LENESAS Page 55 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Change the Build Tool Version You can change the version of the build tool compiler package used in the project main project or subproject Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select Always latest version which was installed or the version in the Using compiler package version property in the Version Select category Figure 2 45 Using compiler package version Property a Wersion Select lime compile package mstall folder L Er ale iri Using compiler package version Akaye latest vercion which was installed LRTI al es LA Remark 1 When the build tool used in the main project and subprojects is the same you can c
63. Seat test fhe enter ol screen bres a Font and Cobo 16075 2 E Thor qual 3 Y Use remota funchon at ais 4 Y Gies he ania rha de aie projet chanped 5 Diol the results oof esque CubsSurtee Prthon Funcion ip pdre Guha 3 ner Fiara Function buttons E hitializa Al Serinex Lok Gane hop Heb The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Number of screen lines Specify the number of screen lines for the Python console Either enter a number between 5000 and 100000 directly via the keyboard or specify a number via the E but tons The default is 10000 Remark This item can be set or referred by using CS Python property common ViewLine 2 Throw exception Throws an exception Does not throw an exception default Remark This item can be set or referred by using CS Python property common ThrowExcept 3 Use remoting function at startup Enables the function for linking to external tools when starting the Python console default Disables the function for linking to external tools when starting the Python console Remark This item can be set or referred by using CS Python property common UseRemoting R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 221 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 4
64. Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to run a batch build and then click the Build Rebuild or Clean button Remark 1 See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build E 5 1 Run a build Rebuild E 5 2 Run a rebuild Clean E 5 3 Run a clean Remark 2 The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run Remark 3 If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a batch build then all these files are saved Remark 4 If a project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then builds rebuilds cleans will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CS see the 2 8 Run a Build E 5 6 Stop running a build To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click the button on the toolbar Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and batch build Build E 5 1 Run a build Rebuild E 5 2 Run a rebuild Batch build E 5 5 Run a batch build R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 278 of 283 Aug 01 2014 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL CS V3 00 00 E 5 7 Save the build results to a file You can save
65. Shortcut to a folder Specify a shortcut to a folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or sub project folder This property of the Files node and Build tool generated files node is not displayed Default Blank How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category of the Files node and Build tool generated files node is not displayed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 161 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Memo Add memos to the category of files Add one item in one line The specified memo is displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 162 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Figure A 17 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input gtr kg 1 Function buttons
66. Simulator 2 Clean sample E p File Open Folder with Explorer Ef Windows Explorer Menu Add b Wy 2et sample as Active Project G Save Project and Development Tools as Package E Paste Ctl e Rename ES EE Property Remark When you select Open Folder with Explorer from a file s context menu the folder the file is saved in is opened in Explorer R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 31 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 7 Set the build order of projects Builds are run in the order of subproject main project but when there are multiple subprojects added the build order of subprojects is their display order on the project tree To change the display order of the subprojects on the project tree drag the subproject to be moved and drop it on the desired location However when dependent projects have been set builds of those projects are run first Dependent projects are set in the Dependent Projects Settings dialog box which is opened by selecting the Project menu gt gt Dependent Projects Settings Figure 2 24 Dependent Projects Settings Dialog Box Project SubPropecti x Dependent projecto T MahProjeci subPrapeci SubPropecid OK Conca Help Select the dependent source project in Project select a project to be referenced as the dependent project from a check box in Dependent projects and click the OK button Remark 1 By default an active pro
67. TE type Tnlerre diate file output folder Caution When the main project is selected only the main project settings are made Even if subprojects are added their settings are not made 2 8 Runa Build This section explains operations related to running a build 1 Build types The following types of builds are available Table 2 1 Build Types Description Build Out of build target files runs a build of only updated files gt See 2 8 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild Runs a build of all build target files gt See 2 8 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with the change of the build setting gt See 2 8 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has gt See 2 8 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remark 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they are displayed on the project tree see 2 7 3 Change the build order of subprojects Note that when the build target project depends on another project the build of the depended proj ect is run before the target project Note that if parallel build between projects see the General Build category of the Option dialog box is enabled and also there is no dependency between the projects the execution order of build is not fixed i e depen
68. The debug tool in circuit emulator simulator etc used Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Hereafter referred to as Analyze Tool node The analyze tool used Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project File Hereafter referred to as File node Files registered to the project are displayed directly below the File node Download files Hereafter referred to as Download files node This is a node for adding download files to the project Note that this node is shown only when the project type is a debug dedicated project Build tool generated files Hereafter referred to as Build tool generated files node This node is created during a build Files created by the build tools are displayed directly below the node except for object files This node is always shown under the File node Displayed files cannot be renamed deleted or moved This node is always displayed below the File node This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project Startup RL78 Hereafter referred to as Startup node Aug 01 2014 ENESAS This is a node for adding other than standard startup files to the project This node is always shown under the File node Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project Page 128 of 2
69. The default title for a newly created and unsaved Editor panel is Source X where X is the unique incremented number for creating the new source file Open Opens the Open File dialog box for opening files and projects Open with Encoding Opens the Open File dialog box in which you can select a file to be opened with a specific encoding and then the Encoding dialog box in which you can select the encoding Add Subproject Add New Subprojec t Add File Add New File Displays a cascading menu of items to add Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to the project Opens the Create Project dialog box for adding a new subproject to the project Opens the Add Existing File dialog box and add the selected file s to the project Opens the Add File dialog box create a file with the selected type and add it to the project A file extension is assigned to the new file and it is opened by the applica tion Close Project Closes the currently open project If the currently open project or its files have been modified then the pro gram will ask if you would like to save your changes Close File Closes the Editor panel currently in focus If the file has been modified then the program will ask if you would like to save your changes Save Project Saves the settings of the currently open project to a projec
70. a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 71 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 68 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box selected build mode Budd mode list Lietaulteunid Select the build mode to be duplicated from the build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog box will open Figure 2 69 Character String Input Dialog Box Build Mode In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project Figure 2 70 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode r 7 1 Selected build mode Buildiade2 pl to All Burid mode list Duplicate 2 Change the build mode Change the build mode to the newly created build mode see 2 7 7 Change the build mode 3 Change the setting of the build mode Select the build tool node on the project tree and change the build options and macro definition settings on the Property panel R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 72 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Remark Creating a build mode is regarded a pr
71. all shortcut key setting to their default values Close Ends the shortcut key assignment and closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 245 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Rearrange Commands dialog box This dialog box allows you to change the arrangement including addition and deletion of menu items and buttons in the Main window Figure A 58 Rearrange Commands Dialog Box Open with Encoding Move Un Ada MoveDewn Modify Selecton we Close lt Olbject gt Save Project Save Project AS Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Commands tab of the User Setting dialog box click the Rearrange Commands button Description of each area 1 Choose a menu or toolbar to rearrange area This area allows you to specify the item whose position you want to change First select the Menu Bar if you want to change the menu item or Toolbar if you want to change the toolbar but ton using the option button and then select the category to be changed from the drop down list 2 Commands area This area displays a list of commands belonging to the category selected in the Choose a menu or toolbar to rear range area which will be displayed in the Main window You can change the arrangement of these commands using t
72. be changed at one time 2 Select the new microcontroller The Change Microcontroller dialog box will open At this time the current microcontroller is selected in the Change microcontroller to area aoe 2 43 had Microcontroller Dialog Box ETP re AAA Change microcon roller bo fal Search saree tke ke a Product Prpa aabt agadu 5 On chip ROM soe K Eves 768 On chip RAM siel vet 131072 Additional indorrmadornPsckeee PLOPOMLEA A BEF SRaNACEFEL Hdp ee A E 1 i RSFSGINAC SFPE Di WM ESFSGIMACALC 1 pro I RSFS6SMAC LEL 145i I RSF S63NACELE 1 005in RSF S63NACeLEC145pin Y RSF S6aNACK BCH I TGpin Y RSF S6aNACEF Bl 144pir WP RSF S6aNACEF Cl tpi Y PAF RRINACEF PY 10 0pi Ok O Ganel Hepo After selecting the new microcontroller click the OK button Remark The OK button becomes valid when the selected microcontroller differs from the current microcon troller R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 54 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 44 Change Microcontroller Dialog Box After Selecting New Microcontroller Chenge microcontroller to aa tSearch microcontroller Product Hare R5F56104 FP On chip ROM size KEyiesk 768 Orechip RAM size Bytes 131072 W R FEG Additional B I RSFS 1065 FP 1d pin IntormatiorrPackare PLO0P0144k A 4 ME RSF S56 108k BOL 176pin We RSFSG107VaF P iddpin FE RSFSGIO PA BG 176 pin ME RSFS6108 VRE P pin WE RSF
73. button to open the Font Dialog Box and configure the fonts for your text editor Figure A 40 Font Dialog Box daBbYyiz 4 Buttons Opens the Open Option Setting File dialog box to refer the settings saved in the file to this category Opens the Save Option Setting File dialog box to save the settings of this category to a file R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 209 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 210 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General External Tools category Use this category to register external tools that can be launched directly from CS and configure these external tools when they are so launched Registering an external tool here allows it to be launched directly via the Tool menu Figure A 41 Option Dialog Box General External Tools Category
74. category node is added below the File node Select Add New Category from the Project menu Select Add New Category from the context menu of either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node Remark 1 The default category name is New category Remark 2 You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 130 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE k Moving a category You can move a category node by the following procedure The category node is moved below the File node Drag the category node you want to move and then drop it onto the destination Remark 1 If you drop the category node in the main project or subproject the individual options set in the file in the category node are retained Remark 2 If you drop the category node between the different projects or onto the main project or subproj ect in same project the category node is copied not moved Note that the individual option set in the file in the category node is not retained I Adding a folder You can add a folder using such as Explorer by the following procedure The folder is added below the File node The folder is added as a category Drag the folder using such as Explorer and drop it onto the destination The Add Folder and File dialog box will open Specify the file types and subfolder levels in the folder to be added Caution Y
75. color The Font color button is enabled c Use default background color Displays items selected via the Setting place area using the standard background color Displays items selected via the Setting place area with a user defined background color The Background Color button is enabled d Buttons Font Color The Edit Colors Dialog Box opens Specify the text color of the item selected via the Setting place area Note however that this button will be disabled if the Use default color check box is selected Background Color The Edit Colors Dialog Box opens Specify the background color of the item selected via the Setting place area Note however that this button will be disabled if the Use default background color check box is selected Reset Selected Item Col Resets the color information for the item selected via the Setting place area to ors the defaults R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 208 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 39 Edit Colors Dialog Box i a l O il h n i 1 im 11 11 11 a l a j 2 Display example area Display sample text using the color and font settings from the Color options area By default the string AaBbCc is shown but you can type an arbitrary string directly into the text box 3 Font settings for text editor area Click the Font
76. cursor line Duplicates the cursor line inserting a copy of the line immediately after the cursor line Delete Blank Lines c View Deletes the line at the cursor if it is empty or contains only whitespace The View menu displays panel and other view related menu commands Project Tree Shows the Project Tree panel and move the focus to it Property Shows the Property panel and move the focus to it The property selected in the Project Tree panel is shown Output Shows the Output panel and move the focus to it Error List Memory Mapping Profiler Shows the Error List panel and move the focus to it Shows the Memory Mapping Profiler panel and move the focus to it Debug Manager Shows the Debug Manager panel R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 104 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Watch Displays a cascading menu for opening a Watch panel Watch1 Shows the Watch 1 panel Watch2 Shows the Watch 2 panel Watch3 Shows the Watch 3 panel Watch4 Shows the Watch 4 panel Local Variable Shows the Local Variables panel Call Stack Shows the Call Stack panel Memory Displays a cascading menu for opening a Memory panel Memory1 Shows the Memory 1 panel Memory2 Shows the Memory 2 panel Memory3 Shows the Memory 3 panel Memory4 Shows the Memory 4 panel SFR RL78 IOR RH850 RX Shows the SFR pan
77. deyealopenrent sre rot cleared Eco Fine ae ditional Furl inn odus Herr el 4 RHESO Bald tool CRA Phan Build too plugin douse GO FH compiler tor 4057 dl sl Dugga Collection Plug in Debug fool plug in to Los RHISOAX Emulator 5105 labor ig 4 Rx Sud wal LH Plein Bik iiol phig ri 10 ust LFS compilar for FA 7 AAI 23 Budd bal OAL Ph r Build toe phig ri io ute CPL canada dor AL Pd Description The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Plug in Setting Description of each area 1 Plug in list area This area shows a list of the build tool and debug tool plug ins installed in this product in the following format Module Name Shows the plug in module names The plug ins read in when this product is started are selected with check boxes Description Shows a simple description of the plug in Function buttons Button Function Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 232 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional Function tab This tab is used to set the plug ins other than build tool and debug tool plug ins to be read in when this product is started plug ins present in the Plug
78. dialog box will open Figure 2 31 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box os can corsar par pral for da CS 5 Preqect Select be proper lana be belt Leet Beet 204 choros heh E OO 44 fee Sekt Leara proyect tb Cil bodos pos can cheese bota propecia HE ai coca When pos presa the JOR bution withou chaeging sep satinga the BEN projects ME made in the eave place 3 he Sek project Ged Che old proyec ate bap a a iranl kiia h pa pana High perky marce Eo bathed Pres hoz Wael please bes Ste ee e der kr aeh project The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings b Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 41 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Progen sere Hera rracrenor s car Rimania Pisa Pac oooe i ley jay h mictocoriral ler peo amr a Product Mere ASFEZIDIES FF T E Groh ROM ire Eby fet Bry E ra Tu E r Far E FFE D ASPE IO LH p E AFEEF Fie E r FUS El E RE FA E pro ee A A i Taled quesion Spur POLEO El E2o 57ST EM Hirer propos End of pai Empty appka EC AA Frosi perrea Pros Plaza Ciara Tpi A E 2 Backup the prosa cormpca ton flee riri gorvarsice gt Hs accord ler i Ssurch
79. displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 214 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Button Function Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 215 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building Figure A 43 Option Dialog Box General Build Category TE Caras al LA OJ Starhe and Exit General Buk 3 Display 1 ul Test Ed io Enge Placed Budd Debra reprime files charg ing A E J F rapa baki is selectod thes bubd a ated when thes edhed souros Pike be pued As arepa ts bad g srta m para dl vah adirga Ahan repr baki ig IEEE El a z Prope eleva wt recontra tee A e eh Orbs afte de Pike olii le wikid a 2 ee Show dependency ike im prefect ben 3 P Ten Lon in Ostras quality report file ehan beald is guccesshul i Edit La PB or 4 Uodk Shon build wher the number of error sosej tha liri koran erat p
80. ererat or Corp let ed dscl o intpre c resetpre c sbrk c sub c vecithl c Daf aulthui ldaub ebe Default Bui hira mol J Renesas Optimizing Linker Completed Build enmdedtErroarc0 Warming 0 haub DefauliBalld J 1 Start build sanple DefaultBuild H Daf aut Bul ds le ib Library Generator Lonp let ed Adoscl c intpre c reetpre c sample c sbrk c weckibl c min cl uefa ddr le abs Delsul Bui ldisane le mol J e Build endediError 0 Waminsi Meamele Defanltbui ld EndediSuccess 2 Projects Failed 0 Projects iooo xox xa loc sor ext ex sem 22 A O o 2 14M Messages Build Tool Rapid Build The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu Output panel dedicated items Edit menu Output panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area Displays messages and the search results output from each tool The All Messages tab consolidates and displays all output messages The message colors differ as follows depends on the type of the output message the character color background color is set in the General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box Message type Example Default Description Normal message AaBhCr Character color Black Information on something Background White color
81. et ea ead 31 2 4 6 Open a project folder in Explorer 2 0 ee eee eens 31 2 4 7 Set the build order of projects 1 eee teen ee eee ees 32 2 4 8 Convert an e studio project into a CS project RX 0 cece eee e cece eevee ee eeeeeeen 34 2 4 9 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CS project 0 een ens 38 2 4 10 Convert a HEW project into a CS project 0 eee ee eens 41 2 4 11 Convert a PM project into a CS project 2 6 ee eens 48 2 4 12 Change the microcontro ler copo its kes ide oe ooh eos we Sea ee 54 2 5 Change the Build Tool Versi cok as ede be ek So ove ee eee a 56 2 6 Set Bulla Target Ele metio rar ohare haa eda eet 56 2 6 1 Adda Netoa poe Lati sd y od Hoe ee CN ee O SN See deb Sed 56 2 6 2 Remove a TIE noma project iia as dira al 60 2 6 3 Remove a file from the build target 1 0 eee ee eee eee ees 61 2 6 4 Classify a file into a category e232 Soaks we RAS ee ES Oe Oe eee ese AAA 61 2 6 5 Chande the tile display orde cere cree ee naa e Berea Sere ae ee 63 2 6 6 Update Tile dependencies n n 24 58 Y dd VAG AT Chet Sve B he et A Ok ed 63 2 Make Settings for Build Operations 0 0 0 eee eee ee eens 66 2 7 1 Import the build options of other project 0 6 eee eee ees 66 2 7 2 Sel MIE Incorrecta ee SS e 67 2 7 3 Change the build order of subprojects 0 0 0 cc eee een eee ens 70 2 7 4 Display alist Of DUNC ODUONS veria A ov eho EUs moe ec Yer 70 2 7 5 Change the build target
82. file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Convert Tabs to Spaces Converts all tabs on the current cursor line into spaces Convert Spaces to Tabs Converts each set of consecutive space characters on the current line to tab characters but only for those sets of spaces that are at least equal to one tab size Tabify Selected Lines Tabifies the current line causing all spaces at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to tabs where possible Untabify Selected Lines Untabifies the current line causing all tabs at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to spaces Make Uppercase Make Lowercase Converts all letters within the selection to uppercase Converts all letters within the selection to lowercase Toggle Character Casing Toggles the character cases uppercase or lowercase of all letters within the selection Capitalize Capitalizes the first character of every word within the selection Delete Horizontal Whitespace Deletes any excess white space either side of the cursor position leaving only one whitespace character remaining lf there the cursor is within a word or not surrounded by whitespace this operation will have no effect Trim Trailing Whitespace Deletes any trailing whitespace that appears after the last non whitespace character on the cursor line Delete Line Duplicate Line Completely delete the current
83. files to be input to the linker and configure these link orders Figure A 28 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order mia File Hiel obj Up Hel aby l leloak Down import ibrani lb brary ib mpz 1 ibray0t bb Function buttons a Cancel Heip The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu Description of each area 1 File area The names of the following files are listed in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files which are generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproject Object module files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Library files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject The default order is the order that the files are added to the project By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names Remark 1 When the mouse cursor is hovered over a file name the path of the file appears in a popup If the file is on the same drive as the project file then it appears as the relative path if it is on the diff
84. is followed by the extension cssp and forms the subproject name b Place Designate the location to create the project file by directly entering it with absolute path or selecting from the Browse button The last designated location is shown in the box C Users User name Documents is shown by default when the project is created for the first time c Button Browse Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected an absolute path of the folder is shown in Place d Make the project folder Use this check box to select whether to create a folder with the project name under the location specified in Place The check box is selected by default e Project file path The full path of the project file specified via Project name and Place is shown Remark 1 The number of characters that can be entered in Project name and Place is up to 259 both for the path name and file name together Remark 2 When the input for Project name violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description The project name is invalid Enter charac The project file name uses characters that are not ters that can be used as a file name allowed A subproject with the same ID has already A subproject with the same ID has already been been registered registered R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 119 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFE
85. is selected is the comparison source The following string is displayed in the upper part of this area Comparing mode Item name of comparison destination Selected Item Item name of comparison source Checked Item Any string in which Size is included in the header name can be the target of difference calculation The cell displaying the differential result is highlighted the character color background color is set in the General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box The sum of the values in each line is displayed at the bottom of the list bo Display the current line The line selected by left clicking of the mouse is the current line The icon is displayed at the left edge and the entire line is highlighted c Specify the selection range of cells The selection range can be specified for individual cells with the following method Click on the cell with pressing the Ctrl key A range from the previous current cell to the clicked cell can be selected with the following method Click on the cell with pressing the Shift key A range from the cell which was selected first to the cell where dragging was ended can be selected with the fol lowing method R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 177 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Click on a cell and continue dragging to the desired cell d Copy the contents of cells The contents of cells in the selected range ca
86. items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Cancel Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 213 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Project category Use this category to configure general settings relating to the project Figure A 42 Option Dialog Box General Project Category Tanara _ A T Startup and Exit a 3 Dipla 1 dal Teel Ed 0 Gupt he common project fle for e do too when the project i saved 2 Font and Cake dl External Tools ry MT zl Build H Det al Python Console E Text Editor Gy Updris Chit 3 User Piara 2 pepa ies Function buttons E hitializa Al Serinex o DK Cael po Heb The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Output the common project file for e2 studio too when the project is saved Outputs the common project file for e studio too when the project is saved default Does not output the common project file for e studio when the project is saved 2 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently
87. main project Default Name of the main project file How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the main project file to save the information on them Default Absolute name of main projects How to change Changes not allowed 2 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Add memos to main projects Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Default Memo Number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 151 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Subproject tab This tab shows the detailed information on subproject categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File 2 Notes Figure A 12 Property Panel Subproject Tab A sub Property a File Fil name sub metsp Relatree path WL Sores Aosolute path Look ds usb mts p Seve wilh abooluite path Mo Noles File name Thie amp the name of the file to which the information of this subproct is to be saved Description of each category 1 File The detailed information on files is displaye
88. menmcenimilar teal is AGS a pr O bettie ESCENA Cy n chp Pub esti E iita Looe On chip RAM a E ROP AC FER Honi dnde MD FSFGCAHA CPC IT pin hiem Packa PLOPI MLE AA E PAFIN FPL pin FSF SNACK tpl RAF SHACKLES Son E FSFSEIHAC LK len Kind al prayer Applea ELAk Projet name gut the mame of the prist here Place Erroneo Docsmen te if Make the project toke LP re ea dee paih l A proa fie lo Creal O Pat tt file compocition of an esbbng prose lo the rev project Pets pict do Lo paria Sete composta files an He dreet enel folder ds srap porel loka Ga a Set the items in the order below 1 Select the microcontroller type Select the microcontroller type to use in the project on Microcontroller You can select the item below RH850 RX RL78 2 Select the microcontroller Select the microcontroller to use in the project on the Using microcontroller area If your microcontroller is not in the Using microcontroller area click the Update button You can open the CS Update Manager window and check for microcontroller information updates via the net work Caution The Update button is only enabled when this product is installed using the installer It is disabled when a packaged item is being used 3 Select the project type Select the project type to create on Kind of project You can select the item below Application CC RH CC RX CC RL R20UT3101EJ
89. name including the path is too The file name with the path is more than 259 char long Make it within 259 characters acters The location where the project is to be The folder creation was canceled or failed so that a created does not exist nonexistent folder has been specified The location for project creation is invalid The file name with the invalid path is designated Enter characters that can be used as a The characters lt gt cannot be used path name for the folder name Some other projects are same setting Attempt to create a project file with the same abso Change the project name or the folder lute path as another project Set the place The creation location is not specified 5 Backup the project composition after before conversion Select this check box to pack up and save the project source files and complete project immediately after the con version Remark This item will be invalid when a PM workspace is converted and the main project node is selected R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 125 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE The destination folder for saving is on the same level as the conversion target project folder named conversion target project folder_org If there is an existing folder file with the same name the folder name has a number from 1 to 99 appended thus A Function buttons Button Function OK Closes this
90. new folders are created with the names new project name_n n 1 2 in the same folder as where the project file is to be saved One subproject file is saved in one folder 2 9 2 Save all files You can save the project file and all the files being edited From the File or Project menu select Save All the project file is overwritten with the current settings information and all files being edited are saved Figure 2 92 Save All Item File New wh Open Ctrl 0 Open with Encoding Add Close Project Close main c Save Project Ciri Shift S aR Save Project As iW Save main c Ctrl S MH Save maln c As Ll Page Setup Print Ctrl P Print Preview Recent Files Recent Projects i Exit 2 9 3 Pack and save the project and this product You can copy the product suite IDE language tools microcontroller information etc and project set also includes subprojects if they exist to a specified folder and save it organized into a single folder Select the Project node on the project tree and if you select Save Project and Development Tools as Package on the context menu If the project composition and properties have been changed the message dialog box below will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 85 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 93 Message Dialog Box When you save the project click the Yes button When you don t save
91. object you clicked Figure B 2 Sample Context Menu By Copy Ctrlec Select All Ctra S Clear ey Tag Jump Shift F12 S Jump to Previous Message Ctri Shift F11 Jump to Next Message Ctr Shift F12 e Helo for Message R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 257 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED This section describes the manuals of CS for CC the integrated development environment for the microcontrollers RH850 RX and RL78 The manuals are organized as follows Remark The help that you can refer will differ depending on which products are installed 1 9 10 11 Installer This manual describes the integrated installer and integrated uninstaller Remark This manual is not provided in the help form Project Operation This manual This manual describes an outline of CS This manual covers the basic operations of CS and the procedure of build using CS Pin Configurator Code Generator Pin View Operation 1 This manual describes the design tool pin assignment Code Generator Peripheral Function OperationNote 1 This manual describes the design tool code generation Code Generator API Reference 1 This manual describes the files and API functions output by the Code Generator Editor This manual describes the features of the editor CompilerNote 2 This manual describes the roles and functions
92. of the commands of the C compiler assembler and other tools included with CS lt provides information necessary for development using the C compiler and assembler as well as expert knowledge on effective coding techniques This manual also covers messages output by commands of the C compiler and assembler Build Tool OperationNote 2 This manual describes the build tool plug in The build tool component is part of CS It enables various types of information to be configured via a GUI tool This enables you to generate the load module or user library from your source files according to your objectives Debug Too Note 1 This manual describes how to control the connection and execution settings of your debug tool It also provides information for when you use the connected debug tool to debug your programs Analysis Tool This manual describes the analyze tools The analysis tool analyzes the source program and information while the program is executing and provides information about the functions and variables Python Console This manual describes the usage of the Python console and the functions properties classes and events that have been extended for CS Updater This manual describes how to manage CS licenses and how to update tools and help files that have been installed Message This manual describes output messages of CS excluding messages output by commands of the C compiler and assembler Note 1 This manual is s
93. only enabled when this product is installed using the installer It is disabled when a packaged item is being used 5 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 L ENESAS Page 201 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Display category Use this category to configure general settings relating to program messages Figure A 36 Option Dialog Box General Display Category T Genaral Le A 3 Startup ard Exit General Dirie al 1 1d Mercere des box epia beat Wecrirg sra error al Fort eni La dos i 2 zai gt Tiber depl pe dor onb 3 ink Di Show function hey bas l Build TE 4 ET Shee amda coclents efik ici 5 a alarini Tab dt E a Tet Editor 6 Ene Jj Sekti tha fle opere ith biei editer in proc tree 7 i 2 Shere geir by one of Windows Explorer n propos tree UF l Hrer ei en Am r 8 Location p a lors butinn for a
94. open the Start pane and then click the GO button in the Create New Project area or Create New Multi core Project area From the File menu select New gt gt Create New Project From the Project menu select Create New Project 2 When creating a subproject From the Project menu select Add gt gt Add New Subproject On the Project Tree panel select project or subproject and then select Add gt gt Add New Subproject from the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 115 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Microcontroller Select the microcontroller type to use in the project You can select the item below RH850 RX RL78 2 Using microcontroller area Select a microcontroller to use in the project a Microcontroller search box You can search a microcontroller selected in the list of microcontrollers simply b List of microcontrollers Select a microcontroller The microcontrollers that correspond to the microcontroller type selected in Microcontroller are listed and cate gorized by their nicknames Caution If this dialog box is opened from the Create New Multi core Project area on the Start panel only the microcontrollers for RH850 multi core are displayed The following information on the selected microcontroller that is used in the project is shown in the box at right Product Name
95. or context menu Remark When either one of the Project node Subproject node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node file or Category node is selected in Project Tree panel while the Property panel is open the detailed information of the selected node is displayed Description of each area 1 Name for the selected node area and button group a Name for the selected node area In this area the name of the selected node in Project Tree panel is displayed This area is left blank when multiple nodes are selected R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 147 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE b button group Locks properties to prevent the property value from being modified by wrong operation of a mouse or a keyboard mi locks properties al unlocks properties This button is only on the following tabs Tabs displayed when the Build Tool node is selected Tabs displayed when the C source file C source file CC RX assembly source file CC RH CC RL assembler source file CC RX CC RL object file CC RH CC RL and object module file CC RX Tabs displayed when the library file is selected except for File Information tab Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Find tab target Property names property values and active help character strings can be found Collapses the entire currently displayed detailed
96. panel Dependent Projects Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to reference set the dependent projects Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer object module files and library files to be input to the linker and configure these link orders Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that the project has Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to display how the process has been pro gressed when the time consuming process is taken place Message dialog box This dialog box is used to display messages output by the various tools Pack Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to pack and save the project and this product Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CS environment Plug in Manager dialog box This dialog box is used to set the plug ins to be read in when this product is started User Setting dialog box This dialog box allows you to customize toolbars and menus dis played in the Main window New Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new toolbar to appear in the Main window Rename Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the name of a toolbar created by the user Customize Keyboard dialog box This dialog box is
97. project you can perform source level debugging step execution in source level units etc You can also add files other than C source files as necessary Caution To perform source level debugging a load module file with the symbol information must be added as a download file to debug see E 3 1 Add a download file When you add load module files to the Download file node of the project tree and download to the debug tool based on source file information obtained from the download file source files are automatically added to the project tree Caution 1 When a load module file has been added in the Download File Settings tab on the Property panel of the debug tool source files are not added to the project tree Caution 2 Whether or not to automatically add source files to the project tree is determined by a setting in the Gen eral Build category in the Option dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 L ENESAS Page 263 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL When there are files which cannot be added by the above method use the following methods to add them Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing file a Add an individual files Drag a file s from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the File node on the project tree Figure E 7 Project Tree Panel Adding a File Project Tree 29 IA g i Debug n y Project JE RIFIO1010xAFP Microcont
98. setting and closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 236 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbars tab You can set whether toolbars are displayed or not change toolbar names and make new toolbars Figure A 53 User Setting Dialog Box Toolbars Tab View Panels Bookmark 4 Program Analyzer Stack Usage Tracer Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Toolbars area Display a list of the names of registered toolbars A check mark appears in front of the name of the toolbar currently displayed in the Main window By removing the check mark you make a setting so that the toolbar will not be displayed 2 Buttons Opens the New Toolbar dialog box to make a new toolbar The name of the new toolbar will be added to the list displayed in the Tool bars area with a check mark placed in front Note that there are no buttons on the newly created toolbar The register buttons on it use the Commands tab Opens the Rename Toolbar dialog box to change the name of the currently selected toolbar This function is disabled when a toolbar other than those created by the user is selected R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 2
99. specify a number via the buttons 3 Buttons Update Manager Option Displays the Update Manager Options dialog box Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 226 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 Button A WINDOW REFERENCE Function Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 227 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Other User Information category Use this category to configure other setting relating to user information Figure A 48 Option Dialog Box Other User Information Category Tanara A il Startup ond Esii Others per Infor maton 3 Displas 3 External Tenet Ed toe Epa iha urar 5 Font and Galo T External Toots kiper ricerca ion i E jai A Project Ma ere Site ation al Gal User infor matios a Chi a Python Contos 1 E Text Editor oe i paria Liar riar LL Others E mul 2 ESE o Fam nuniber Pad oral niio male Swedes Information 2 rstiafica Sailings Function buttons _
100. the execution results of the build standard output and standard error from the external build tool used that displayed on the Output panel as a text file Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save As dialog box will open Figure E 35 Save As Dialog Box E3 save As es J work Debugoniy 44 Search Debugon cE 7 Orpanite New Folder a er Favorites F 7 Je sus Debug Crd e Downloads E Desktop U Recent Placos Sa Ubraries Documents m Pictures File nae Dutput Buld Todd tot Save as type Test file bxt Hide Folders In the dialog box specify a text file name to be saved and the location in which the file is saved and then click the Save button Page 279 of 283 R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Aug 01 2014 Revision Record Description Summary Aug 01 2014 First Edition issued CS V3 00 00 User s Manual Project Operation Publication Date Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2801 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2549 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898
101. which have been entered exceeds the maximum num ber of restriction in the property that called this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 168 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE b Button Browse When adding the path Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box If a folder is selected the path will be added in Path One path per one line When adding the file name including the path Opens the dialog box to select a file If a file is selected the file will be added in Path One path per one line c Permit non existent path When this check box is selected the existence of the path specified in Path One path per one line or the valid ity of the character string specified in the path is not checked d Include subfolders automatically Select this check box and then click the Browse button to specify the path The path will be added including subfolders to Path One path per one line up to five levels deep Caution This item is displayed only when adding the path 2 Placeholder area The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascend ing order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in the path edit area a Placeholder This area displays the placeholder b Value This area displays the string after replacement with t
102. 00 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 254 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE One Point Advice dialog box This dialog box is used to display tips for using CS Figure A 63 One Point Advice Dialog Box Ore Point Advice mm Do vou Kote What options ae displayed on the poper panel A properti pael for tire opina cele dapaya e Goons available for lhe Her inst is current selected on He project res pare 1 Por camps bo chow compile opbora aed seltmes select the build ton on thes propi res wth a righi click snd pelear Prostate ts b Casi Gon tana rinden 0117450 lt Back Hext gt 2 3 Do net sos de dialog box at startup Help Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select One Point Advice Automatically opens at CS startup when Do not show this dialog box at startup is unchecked Description of each area 1 Tips display Area Tips for using CS are randomly shown edit not allowed 2 Page feed area The current page number in this dialog box and the buttons for page feed are shown Button Function Back One previous page is shown The button is disabled when the first page is shown Next One next page is shown The button is disabled when the last page is shown 3 Do not show this dialog box at startup This con
103. 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Accelerate the Startup Time of CS Use the following method to accelerate the startup time of CS Use rapid start 2 11 1 Use rapid start The rapid start function makes CS permanently resident to accelerate the startup time You can enable or disable the rapid start in the General Startup and Exit category in the Option dialog box with option Reduce startup time by enabling rapid startup Default enabled When the rapid start is enabled after login to Windows CS is in the standby state and the HA icon appears in the task tray Figure 2 104 Context Menu of Rapid Start Icon Gi Start Exit 1 Displaying the main window To release CS from the standby state and display the Main window select Start in the context menu of the R icon or double click the icon Click the E35 button on the Main window to return CS to the standby state an cy icon is displayed in the task tray during standby Exiting CS To exit CS select Exit in the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 92 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Manipulate CS on the Command Line You can launch CS from the command line e g the Windows command prompt and control it via command input without displaying the Main window This section describes the control of CS when launched from the Windows command prompt From the command prompt execute Cub
104. 0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 17 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Select this to generate the load module file and hex file from C source files by using the build tool provided by CS The generated file will be the debug target Caution Remark 1 Remark 2 Remark 3 This item is not displayed when microcontrollers for RH850 multi core are selected in 2 Select the microcontroller If the build tool is CC RH the following start up source files are generated in the project folder These files are also registered in the project tree File Name Description cstart asm For defining the start up routine from the occurrence of a reset to a branch to the main function iodefine h For defining I O registers main c For defining the empty main function vecttbl asm For defining the interrupt vector table If the build tool is CC RX the following start up source files are generated in the project folder The files marked with OK in the Registration in Project Tree column are also registered in the project tree When necessary also register the files marked with in the project tree File Name ProjectName c Description For defining the main function Registration in Project Tree dbsct c hwsetup c For setting up standard sections For initializing hardware intprg c For defining interrupt functions iodefine h lowlvl src lowsrc c For defining l O reg
105. 101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 45 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS ing to the build mode When the link order has not been specified in the HEW project linkage proceeds in alphabetical order When files are classified into folders in the tree view of a HEW project the folders are replaced with the CS category after the project has been converted If nesting is to a depth of 20 or more folders categories the 20th stage and deeper stages are ignored Files in such folders are added to the 20th category Remark 2 Except when conversion is performed from the HEW project for RX into the CS project for RX and from the HEW project for SuperH into the CS project for RH850 the target for conversion is only the file structure information of the HEW project file Remark 3 The project files after conversion are created in the folder specified in the Project Convert Setting dialog box Remark 4 Conversion of projects that were created in HEW V 4 07 or a later version is supported The supported versions of the build tools of HEW are as shown below SHC C Ver 7 0 or higher H8C C Ver 6 0 00 or higher NC30 V 5 20 Release 1 or higher NC308 V 5 20 Release 1 or higher NC100 V 1 01 Release 00 or higher CCRX V 1 00 Release 00 or higher Remark 5 The project which used the Custom Build Phase cannot be converted Remark 6 The target for conversion is only the HEW project file of the Renesas Electronics c
106. 11 Start Panel 2 FUNCTIONS Learn About 5 We Pera resdrg de bbris do led cat refed oar bee don in Tha uiai cordance ba miernie criba be rra wea CE Create Now Project A ra pearl canbe coated Go RSA poi cn Sy be stares Er a hee e ra red do re ere carp Greate Now Mulli oore Project Go y pidiera ic bj al rr bal aro a rra rar Cora fal radios 057 be real rol o iora lj plai peje about bering babare ard za aon feature bor there Qpen Existing Propect Los He pepi od Ch Lon 0 be pr hry bis de Pini are rl Raced Fapa Fave Propecia 2 ib SUDDO ae a hea Open Exsting e siudiorCubeSsuite Ayh qper omanos Embidded Warkah ERF Project Tha preg carad mth ado ed the oH IDE can ba cord be fhe Ci ped The myg e piai ey ee ete et ee if Baad jara carrtad beben de poes rrhh ara copar by CL FA a suerte in the ron Open Sample Project Haro margi pres ha can ba bull reedita ee praded Aa mbci fhe dared peget beni Hha inl helos preso ds 50 bid n ad pee e on lodge da opa de slsoted pde projeol ANI 1 Tica ANGI Tuitis Esso Click the GO button in the Create New Multi core Project area to open the Create Project dialog box Remark The Create New Multi core Project area is minimized by default click to resize the area R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Aug 01 2014 Page 24 of 283 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 12 Create Project Dialog Box When First Started Cr
107. 3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Remark This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Caution 1 The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been registered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item and stop the rapid build Caution 2 lfthis item is selected a file that is registered in the project but does not exist a file grayed out will not be observed even if it is registered again by the Explorer etc To observe the file reload the project file or select this item again after unselecting this item and closing this dialog box 2 Show dependency files in project tree Displays the file group on which the source file depends on the project tree Does not display the file group on which the source file depends on the project tree default Output the quality report file when a build is successful Does not output the quality report file when a build is successful default Remark 1 The quality report file is not output when a rapid build is executed a debug dedicated project is built and compiling or assembling is executed in file units Remark 2 The following information item is output to the quality report file Time and date on which the file is created Log of the build results Information on the command file which is us
108. 3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 274 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 5 2 Run a rebuild The command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 2 Setting the command when running a clean and then the command specified with the Commands executed in the project building property in the category same as above is executed see 1 Setting the command when running a build This allows you to run a build of all build target files The commands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see E 4 3 Set the target project for a build can be executed Remark If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a rebuild then all these files are saved 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Click the button on the toolbar Remark 1 Rebuilds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are rebuilt in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subprojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and dropping it on the desired location Remark 2 If a project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then rebuilds will be run for that project usin
109. 37 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Delete Deletes the selected toolbar This function is disabled when a toolbar other than those created by the user is selected Discards all changes made to the selected toolbar and returns it to the default state When a toolbar created by the user is selected this button returns the selected toolbar to the state with no buttons registered on it Function buttons Button Function Keyboard Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Close Cancels the toolbar menu customization settings and closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 238 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands tab You can customize items to include on a toolbar or a menu Figure A 54 User Setting Dialog Box Commands Tab a Cabegories Al Commands a Function buttons a The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Categories area Display a list of the categories of commands that CS provides 2 Commands area Display a list of the names of commands belonging to the category selected in the Categories area together with their icons if exist When All Commands
110. 5 Startup ard Eri mao il Exil Text Editor Meru fri l Font ond Calor EY ere lee 5 Prop 1 3 Buk as Python Console E Text Edine Leckie 1 a Loe Mer tee Hea External Tazi 2 3 Caer ha Tnm cath gu th corria pat Slarbop capti Etir i opt an E fura LA Shar ap ipider ista tun In TE a fm El perl er lice Carpet pare put aton af startup Chapani iroonia lec O Ciam wreke een command aril Function buttons E hitializa Al Setlines BR Conos hop Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Registered external tools area a Menu list area This area displays a list of menu items added to the Tool menu for launching external tools that have been added via this dialog box To add a new external tool click the New button When you click the New button the item New External Tool is added to the bottom of the list In this state configure the details of the external tool to add in the New registration area Up to 8 external tools can be registered To change the settings of an external tool that has already been registered select the name of the external tool to modify and edit the desired setting The order of the items on this list is the same as the order in the menu b Buttons Adds the item New External Tool to the bottom
111. 55d panal Aight adye cf Pa ish wma Sou nee bo redler dor fo changes tn taka eect 9 iridia Sailing Function buttons E hitialse Al Setingt Lok Gant hop Hele The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Message dialog box display level Select the Message dialog box display level verbosity from the following drop down list Regardless of this setting all messages are displayed in the Output panel Information warning and error Displays all messages in a Message dialog box Warning and error Displays warning and error messages in a Message dialog box default Error only Only displays error messages in a Message dialog box Fatal error only Only displays fatal error messages in a Message dialog box 2 Toolbar display type Use this area to select the format in which to display toolbars on each panel via the following drop down list Icon only Displays icons only default Icon and label Displays both icons and labels text 3 Show function key commands Displays the Function Key bar in the Main window default R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 202 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 C Does not display the Function Key bar in the Main window Show window contents while re
112. 63NACKFE Microcontroller A OC RX Build Tool me RX Simulator Debug Tool Y File Remark After creating a project you must add target files to the project in order to perform building or debugging For details on how to add these files see the following When Application or Library is selected on Kind of project gt See the 2 6 1 Add a file to a project When Debug Only is selected on Kind of project gt See E 3 Add a File to a Project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 21 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 3 Add a new subproject Select the Project node on the project tree and if you select Add gt gt Add New Subproject on the context menu the Create Project dialog box will open Figure 2 9 Create Project Dialog Box When Adding a New Subproject Usne merocorimiler Er Sean h menmc nimilar peta lia ly AGEN Product Mame FEF 56 SM Aco nchp ROM sey tes 763 E dell do Mo On chip RAM CST SFSRIHAC F dion Addkioral Fi CFT RTE F E Ee a Pr gt APNA arC 175 hiem akae lPi 1445 A 4 E FoF SRM Ae FP 1 piel Me FSFSGNACKLO Tipe E FAFGCIMACS LES Son Me FSFSEIMACLA on Kira of parce Applicalionil Rx Project name input the rame of the project here Place Tier hz a mp le F Make the project folder 2 e chen odos pilh of A prope fide bo ereile h O Para tet file composition of an es bbng projet ho the rie projeti Ppeti la ba paras oor composite
113. 83 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 5 4 Runa rapid build CS can automatically start a build see E 5 1 Run a build when one of the following events occurs When any one of the following files that are added to the debug dedicated project is updated C source file assembler source file header file jump table file and symbol address file When the C source file assembler source file header file jump table file or symbol address file is added to or removed from the debug dedicated project When the property of the build tool in the Property pane of the debug dedicated project is changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default Figure E 33 Rapid Build Item When a rapid build Is valid Build Ga Bulld Project F7 gp Rebuild Project Gs Clean Project Rapid Build Update Dependenciez a Ela E Build Debugonly 1 Rebuild Debugonly Lal Clean DebugOnly Update Dependencies of DebuqOniy Shitt F et Set Link Order of DebugOnly lt Stop Build Chi F Ty Build Mode Settings El Batch Build Ty Build Option List Caution Remark 1 Remark 2 Remark 3 E 5 5 Run a batch build When a rapid build Is invalid Build E a og Build Propect F7 Rebuild Project Shift F7 Clean Prop
114. 83 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Node Explanation Category name These user defined categories are used to classify files Hereafter referred to as Category node into modules see Note that this node is always shown under the files node Subproject name Subproject Subprojects added to the project Hereafter referred to as Subproject node Remark 1 Only the tools corresponding to the microcontroller in use are shown Remark 2 When more than one component are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When more than one file are selected and their common properties are different that field is left blank Remark 3 See E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on a debug dedicated project This area has the following functions a Import project files If you drag the project file from the windows explorer and drop in this area you can open the project in Main Window b Add subprojects You can add subprojects by one of the following procedure lt 1 gt Add an existing subproject Select Project node or Subproject node Then select Add gt gt Add Subproject in File or Project menu Add Existing Subproject dialog box appears Select subproject files to add Select Add gt gt Add Subproject in the context menu of Project node or Subproject node Add Existing Subproject dialog box appears Select subproject files to add lt 2 gt Add new s
115. A WINDOW REFERENCE Import Build Options Opens the Import Build Options dialog box to import the build options from the selected project file Note Set Link Order Opens the Link Order dialog box to display object module files and library files to and set their link orders Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Property Displays the selected build tool s property on the Property panel Note See 2 7 1 Import the build options of other project for details about the import function of the build options 5 When a Download file node is selected This node is displayed only for a debug dedicated project see E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Shows the cascading menu to add download files to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project as a download file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project as a download file Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Add New Category Open F
116. Comma Separated Variables csv or Microsoft Office Excel book xls with the following method Select Save Detailed Memory Mapping Data As in File menu The Save As dialog box opens Specify the file in which to save the display contents k Button Opens the Column Chooser dialog box to rearrange columns or set display or non display for columns 4 Tab selection area The detailed memory mapping information that was acquired through analysis when profiling the items selected in the Profiled memory mapping list area are displayed in tabbed pages Selecting a tab allows you to switch to information displayed in the Details of the selected memory mapping area Note that the tabs to be displayed vary with the build option settings of the build tool in use File menu Memory Mapping Profiler panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for File menu in the Memory Mapping Profiler panel other items are common to all the panels Save Detailed Memory Map Saves the contents displayed in the Details of the selected memory mapping area ping Data in the previously saved file When this menu is selected for the first time after launching the program the opera tion is equivalent to when selecting Save Detailed Memory Mapping Data As Save Detailed Memory Map Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents in the Details of the selected ping Data As memory mapping area in the designated file
117. Commands executed in the project building Commands executed in the project building 0 Gommends executed m the project cleaning Commands executed in the project clkanmel l Build mode Selects ihe build mode name to be used dirine build Description of each category 1 Build Mode The detailed information on the build mode is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build mode Select the build mode to be used during a build Note that this property is not applied to Reset All to Default from the context menu Default DefaultBuild How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction DefaultBuild Runs a build with the default build mode that is set when a new project is created Build mode that is Runs a build with the build mode that is added to the project added to the project other than Default other than Default Build Build 2 Build The detailed information on a build is displayed and their configuration can be changed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 156 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed in Specify the commands to be executed when running a build see E 5 1 Run a the project building build of the debug dedicated project The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name Buil
118. ENESAS Page 110 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Cd Moves a caret to the position of the next bookmark This button is disabled in the following cases No bookmark is registered A bookmark is registered only in one line with a caret Clears all the registered bookmarks This button is disabled when no bookmark is registered Opens the Bookmarks dialog box for displaying the list of bookmarks Panel display area The following panels are displayed in this area Project Tree panel Property panel Output panel Please see each panel section for the details of the contents of the display Remark Press the Ctrl Tab keys or the Ctrl Shift Tab keys to display a list of the active panels and move the focus Function keys bar Shows the function keys assigned to the currently active window and the function keys available in the main win dow Hover the mouse cursor over a function key button to display a message about that button Statusbar Shows a brief explanation of the currently selected menu item and the various information necessary to debug etc See the CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug Tool for details R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 111 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Start panel This panel allows you to open a tutorial access create open a project and load a sample project with si
119. IMAD lt ECA 76pin Y PSFS63NADEF BL Apin PEFSGINADFCL Papin BD RSF RRINACE EPL pin z RA AS IS T ee Function buttons al Cancel i Help The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the microcontroller node and then select Change microcontroller from the con text menu Description of each area 1 Change microcontroller to area Select a microcontroller to be used a Microcontroller search box You can search a microcontroller selected in the list of microcontrollers simply b List of microcontrollers Select a microcontroller The microcontrollers can be specified are listed and categorized by their nicknames The following information on the selected microcontroller that is used in the project is shown in the box at right Product Name On chip ROM size Kbytes RX Internal ROM size Kbytes RH850 RL78 On chip RAM size Bytes RX Internal RAM size Bytes RH850 RL78 Additional InformationNote R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 141 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Note Other information appears only when present Function buttons Button Function OK Closes this dialog box and changes the microcontroller according to the designated condition Note that this button is invalid when the target microcontroller
120. If you wish to specify more than one option separate them by spaces FileName Passes the name of the file to display to the external text editor FilePath Passes the absolute path of the file to display to the external text editor FileRelativePath Passes the absolute path of the file from the project folder to display to the external text editor Line Passes the caret position line number to the external text editor 5 Open in internal editor during debug This item is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected Suppresses starting an external text editor and opens the file to display in the Editor panel during debugging default F Opens the file to display in an external text editor 6 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 205 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Font and Color category
121. J0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 275 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 31 Clean Project Item Build Build Project EJ Rebuild Project Shift F7 EG Clean Project Stop Build Ctri F Build Mode Settings El Batch Build Ty Build Option List Remark 1 Cleans are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are cleaned in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subprojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and dropping it on the desired location Remark 2 If a project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then cleans will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CS see the 2 8 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files When running a clean of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure E 32 Clean active project Item eb sub DebudgOniy Subproject ME RIFTOLOLOXAFP Micron El None Build Tool t 4 RHESO Simulator DekGd y a File Build sub_DebugOnty Rebuild sub_DebugOniy Clean sub_DebugOnly Add Remove from Project Paste Rename Property Open Folder with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Set sub_DebugOnly as Active Project Shift Delete Ctrl Fa R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 276 of 2
122. Left of Places in the left part of the target panel Right of Places in the right part of the target panel Below Places in the bottom part of the target panel Center of Places in the target panel as a tab R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 90 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS You can also double click the title bar of the window or right click and select Floating This docks the window at its for mer docking position You can adjust the size of windows docked to the main window by clicking and dragging the splitters 2 10 4 Display multiple panels Click on a panel you wish to view and drag it over another panel you wish to view simultaneously As described in 2 10 3 Dock windows a docking indicator appears Move the mouse pointer to and release the mouse over the location where you wish to place the panel left right top or bottom 2 10 5 Reset the window layout From the Main window s View menu select Reset Layout The window layout is returned to its initial state Figure 2 103 Reset Layout Item Project Tree Property Output Error List Memory Mapping Profiler Debug Manager Watch Local Variable Call Stack Memory OR CPU Register Trace Disassemble Event Show Current PC Location Ctl L Back to Last Cursor Position Forward to Next Cursor Position Tag Jump Shift F12 e or Restore Docking Layout R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 91 of 283 Aug
123. OWS sacado arrodillado AR ta aces tas 90 2 10 4 Display Multiple panels 20002 y See eked be a a A kd Se 91 2 10 5 Reset the WiINGOW IAVOUL ios 46 rida trar dad titi pato da e 91 2 11 Accelerate ihe Startup Time Ol tii A a 92 2 11 1 UV SS TLIC Stata ao a eee 92 2 12 Manipulate CS on the Command Line 2 0 ee eee ee eee eens 93 A WINDOW REFERENCE octet ta hee ia yt das 98 A 1 Describir da Ge bed chase tier ve yee dees its A Ges 98 B EE A O E Sees 257 C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED 0005 208 D INPUT CONVENTIONS Sra A 259 D 1 INPUtCONVSNION SS eesse as erea E iia da eee la 259 D 2 Displaying Icons at Locations of Input Errors veia a A A A A A 259 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL 0 0 0 0 0c 260 E 1 OVNIS W setos matias ds a lso a lito Cesc BM ded dealin dod Patan 260 E 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project 0 ccc eee eee e teen eens 261 E 3 Ada a Flea Rrolecltossir dieta cote khang aie A aa 262 E31 POCA GOWNIOACTIC engines thea th dbeth ewe thee euch aw hes iw twa eked bade hed te 262 E32 Add C source files and other files 2 0 0 ee eee e eee e eens 263 E 3 3 Remove an added file from a project 0 eee eee teens 266 E 4 Make Settings for Build Operations 2 0 0 ee eee eee ees 267 E 4 1 Sel ie COMMAND eel 267 E 4 2 Set the build Mode 2 rara a E ods ia aha aces Lethe A AA eae eee keke ake 269 E 4 3 Set the target project for a Dulles sarsie erae ee ene ee
124. RAM size KBytes of the microcontroller to use in decimal number Bytes Default Internal RAM size of the microcontroller to use How to Changes not allowed change 3 IOR Display Type RH850 The detailed information on the IOR display type is shown IOR display type Displays the IOR display type of the project Default IOR display type of the project How to change Changes not allowed 4 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Add memos to the microcontroller information The memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Default Memo Number of items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can use a text box directly enter the text Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 characters are allowed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 155 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the build tool for the debug dedicated project see E USING AN EXTER NAL BUILD TOOL categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build Mode 2 Build 3 Notes Figure A 14 Property Panel Build Options Tab Property A Mone Property 4 Build Mode Build mode Detaukt Build 4 Build
125. RENCE Message Description The subproject name is invalid A sub In the specified location there is already a main project with the same name cannot be project with the same name excluding extension made in the location where the main proj ect exists Remark 3 When the input for Place violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description The folder name including the path is too The folder name is more than 247 characters long Make it within 247 characters The file name including the path is too The file name with the path is more than 259 char long Make it within 259 characters acters The location where the project is to be The folder creation was canceled or failed so that a created does not exist nonexistent folder has been specified The location for project creation is invalid The file name with the invalid path is designated Enter characters that can be used as a The characters lt gt cannot be used path name for the folder name Remark 4 When the project name and the path name is too long to be shown in each text area is dis played The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over r 5 Pass project area Set this area when reusing the file composition of the existing project main or subproject to create a new project Caution This area is not displayed when this dialog box is opened from the
126. Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed when running a build The placeholders can be described in the script Default Commands executed in the project cleaning 0 How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 commands can be specified 3 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 157 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add memos to this build tool Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty Note that this setting is common to all the build modes Default Memo number of items How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears wh
127. Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 81 of 283 Aug 01 2014 2 FUNCTIONS CS V3 00 00 2 8 6 Stop running a build To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click on the toolbar 2 8 7 Save the build results to a file You can save the execution results of the build output messages of the build tool that displayed on the Output panel Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save As dialog box will open Figure 2 87 Save As Dialog Box A err A A A A e ji wok sample gt 4p Seach sempre p Organtze New Folder hr g de Fevoritez DefaultBuil de Downloads ue sul ME Desktop iA Recent Planes wa Libraries Documents kal Pictures i Fila name Output Buld Tool tyt Save as type Text file txt Save Cancel Hide Folders In the dialog box specify the file to be saved and then click the Save button 2 8 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files You can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build hereafter referred to as clean Running a clean is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 7 5 Change the build target project 1 When running a clean of the entire project From the Build menu select Clean Project Page 82 of 283 R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 88
128. S ignore this and start another process plug in optionA plug Specify an option for the plug in see 3 Plug in Options 1M pParametet ssal project file name Start CS displaying the Main window with the specified project file loaded Remark When the Ip Ipall np or npall option is specified the settings of the Plug in Manager dia log box are not changed Plug in Options Below are the plug in options that can be specified Option Description psAscript file name This is the Python Console plug in option After loading the project file in CS run the code in script file name If an unnecessary parameter is specified and the script file cannot be loaded then an error will be displayed and the script file will not be executed A sample script file is shown below R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 96 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS debugger Connect debugger Download LoadModule r C project test DefaultBuild test out debugger Register GetValue pc breakpoint BreakCondition breakpoint Address func debugger Breakpoint Set breakpoint debugger Go GoOption WaitBreak debugger Register GetValue pc R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 97 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE A WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes the windows panels and dialog boxes related to the basic operations of CS and the pro
129. SsuteHyAperormnancs Embrided Workshop PEM Project Tha pearl carad mth s rho mri fhe old DE can ba corvettes ha C54 ped SUppO version aida The 000 e cece be ds ca es ead pera Open Sample Project Haro margi poes ha cn ba bull red a pradei Aa reci a darmed ped bon Hha nt peon ort bs GO buon and specifa the destination bkis do nope ihe paid arae prooi AX anis AHESD Ce POST TT Tiiriy En _iperaiece AO PIDA ASS FIESTA ARO Tiida Esso pat Description See 2 3 2 Create a new project See 2 3 4 Create a project for multi core RH850 Note that this area is minimized by default click to resize the area See 1 Open an existing project See 2 4 8 Convert an e studio project into a CS project RX See 2 4 9 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CS project See 2 4 10 Convert a HEW project into a CS project See 2 4 11 Convert a PM project into a CS project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 16 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 Create a new project This section describes how to create a new project Remark When a project for RH850 multi core is created see 2 3 4 Create a project for multi core RH850 From the Project menu select Create New Project the Create Project dialog box will open Figure 2 6 Create Project Dialog Box When First Started Mocrocorriral ler Lema merocorimiler Ars h
130. Startup and Exit Chereral Debug a Dil 1 al Enter Edis Opec Grericeded insi made fiag hangra rl Tol Adj garce diles surtormeatcally Gor Te Deba Onk project ohy Ernsbie rek Sound AS ly T Buik al Python Consola E Text Edbtor Dp Update hit 3 Ue Fiara 4 Faika Sarl ie Function buttons E hitialse Al Setingt o DK Carol Repl Bee The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Observe downloaded load module files changing Monitors load module files downloaded to the debugging tool for changes When there is a change a message dialog box confirming whether to execute the download is displayed Does not monitor load module files downloaded to the debugging tool for changes default 2 Add source files automatically for the Debug Only project only In a debug dedicated project when downloading a load module file into the debug tool source files are automatically added to the project tree default In a debug dedicated project when downloading a load module file into the debug tool source files are not automatically added to the project tree Caution This function is only valid when a load module file has been added to the Download files node of the project tree When a load module file has been added in the
131. a category You can create a category under the File node and classify files by the category This makes it easier to view files added to the project on the project tree and makes it easier to manage files according to function To create a category node select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 61 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Windows Explorer Menu GA Remove from Project Shift Delete Copy Ctrl C F l Paste Ctrl V Rename F3 3 Property 2 02 JB RSFS63NACKFB Microcontroller A CC RX Build Tool ex RX Simulator Debug Tool i E e a Jen CLP A BY New category Remark 1 The default category name is New category To change the category name you can use Rename from the context menu of the category node Remark 2 You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node Remark 3 Categories can be nested up to 20 levels You can classify files into the created category node by dragging and dropping the file R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 62 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 5 Change the file display order You can change the display order of the files and category nodes by the buttons on the project tree Figure 2 55 Too
132. a folder is set is highlighted as shown in the example below Ordinal category Source LEA Category in which a shortcut to a folder has been El SOURCE set Highlighting the project that has been changed The file component that is added to the project and the property of the project component are changed the proj ect name is followed by and is displayed in boldface The boldface is canceled when the project is saved The project that has not been changed A sample Project The project that has been changed UR sample Project Highlighting the active project The active project is underlined Non active project A sample Project Active project UR sample Project Updating the status of file highlighting The state of highlighting for files read only files non existent files and overlay icons is updated by the following procedure Select on the toolbar Running the editor The file with the specific extension is opened in the Editor panel When an external text editor is set to be used in the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external text editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS Caution The file with the extension that is not associated with the host OS is not displayed You can open the editor by one of the following procedures Double click the file Select a file and then select Open from the context menu
133. a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Text Remark 2 When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed when running a build The placeholders can be described in the script If you click the OK button the entered commands are displayed as subproperties Figure E 16 Commands executed in the project building Property After Setting Commands Commands executed in the project buildine 1 2 Setting the command when running a clean Set the command to be executed when running a clean see E 5 3 Run a clean in the Commands executed in the project cleaning property In this property set the command to delete intermediate files generated files and the like output by the build pro cess Figure E 17 Commands executed in the project cleaning Property If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 268 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 18 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Eat Text mahe chesi i Placeholder Placeholder Valg Description z ictweProecior CcWwork DebueQrly Absolute path of the active project folder AcheeProecthame Debiw nty Active project rane BuildMedeNsme Dejavu Burd Busld made name MamnProjectDr Ccwork DebugOnly Ab
134. a point where incorrect characters are entered or a required item is missing Remark Placing the cursor over the J icon will pop up the information that indicates the characters to be entered tips to fix the error Figure D 1 Sample Icons Shown at Locations of Input Errors Path Edt ES Particle path par or binek E Primi narrada path Place heeciet Pisgah dde aba Astrea Propil Ceo erred Actes PropciHsns campis R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 259 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL This section describes how to create a project when debugging files generated with a build tool other than the one pro vided by CS CC RH CC RX CC RL E 1 Overview CS automatically determines the load module file or hex file output by the build tool provided by CS CC RH CC RX CC RL as the download file for debugging For this reason you must create a dedicated project hereafter referred to as a debug dedicated project in order to debug a load module file or hex file created by an external build tool e g a com piler or assembler other than the build tool provided by CS as the download file Creating a debug dedicated project enables you to perform debugging without going through the build tool provided by CS A debug dedicated project also enables you to configure commands to execute build processes e g make suited to your execution
135. aa Bak ioe ph do uss Go PH Build tool CO F gt Plug in We ot foresee Bald tool pug i do use CO Diebugger Collection Plug ti Wisxxm exes Deba tool phg to ae AH Code Generator Plein a Ske rr Fhe do pererste the dew Code Gener alir Pres Pha YWeusowsoian boomin Phag in do gererate the dere Elec actor PL oiire aiie plo Eo tp 0 Function buttons Gap All Text Bak The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select About Product name Description of each area 1 Product name area Shows the current version of CS 2 Product License area This displays license information corresponding to the license key 3 Installed product area List each module name and its version used in CS Module Name Shows the module name Version Shows the current version of the module Explanation Shows the brief description of the module R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 250 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Copy All Text Copies all the characters displayed to the clip board OK Closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 251 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Detail Version Information dialog box This dialog box is used to
136. after the change is the same as the current microcontroller or is selected by its nickname from the list of microcontrollers Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 142 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Figure A 8 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type G source file Ec C source file cop cp Foc Header file h hpp m0 Assembler cource file ere te Tart file tet EPA source file Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add New File On the Project Tree panel select the Project node Subproject node File node Category node or Download files node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be created When the file type is selected the description is displayed at the lower box 2 File name area ieee enter the name of the file to be created c is displayed by default Remark If any extension is not designated the one selected in the File type area will be added Also if the ext
137. aged by CS as the unit for application system development CS saves settings information used in the project such as the microcontroller build tool and source files to the project file mtpj and references it 1 Project tree organization and detailed settings The project s settings are made on the Project Tree panel Figure 2 3 Project Tree Panel Project Tree E f L RSFS1111AxFL Microcontroller S i Code Generator Design Tool E A Pin View H 2g Peripheral Functions A Code Preview A CC RX Build Tool e RX Simulator Debug Tool 2 Program Analyzer Analyze Tool E Y File S F Build tool generated files abt sample3 abs e sample3 mot rap sample3 map EJ dbsct c intprg c E resetprg c Ej sample c El sbrk c E wecttbl c b iodefine h Bj sbrk h Bj stacksct h b typedefine h b vect h a sub Subproject RSFS6SNACKFE Microcontroller 4 CC RX Build Tool ex RX Simulator Debug Tool 2 Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 3 18 File On the project tree project components are displayed as the nodes below in a tree view If you select each component node or file its detailed information properties is displayed in the Property panel and you can change its settings You can also make project settings from the context menu for each component node or file Node Explanation Project name Project The project s name Hereafter referred to as Project node R20UT3101EJ0100 Re
138. ame The active project name of the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool FileDir The absolute path of the folder where the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel exists is passed to the external tool MainProjectDir The absolute path of the main project folder of the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool if the main project does not exist then nothing is passed MainProjectName The main project name of the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool Micom ToolPath The absolute path of the install folder of this product is passed to the external tool R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 212 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE OutputDir The program passes the name of the folder with absolute path for the module that is output when the project for the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is built if there is no selection then nothing is passed ProjectDir The absolute path of the project folder of the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool ProjectName The project name of the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool TempDir The absolute path of the temporary folder is passed to the external tool WinDir The absolute p
139. ame F2 S Property Remark If the build of the included source file is not run after editing the header file and running the build update the file dependencies see 2 6 6 Update file dependencies 2 8 2 Run a build of all files A build of all build target files is run hereafter referred to as rebuild The cross reference file is deleted Running a rebuild is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 7 5 Change the build target project 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a rebuild of the active project Select the project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu Figure 2 82 Rebuild active project Item See ct sample Project pmr ME RSFS63NACx 1 Build sample Ay CC RX Bui i Rebuild sample e RX Simulator 3 Clean sample g Fik a Open Folder with Explorer El Windows Explorer Menu Add F Set sample as Active Project Save Project and Development Tools as Package Paste Ctrl V Rename F2 Property EENEI R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 78 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations CS can automatically start a build when one of the following events occurs hereafter referred to as rapid build When any one of the following files that are added to the project is updated C source file assembly sour
140. are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or systems manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applica
141. area Specify the location in which to save the project and this product Enter the absolute path directly or click the Browse button and select the location via the Browse For Folder dialog box a Button Browse Browse For Folder dialog box appears When a folder is selected the path is shown in the text box Remark 1 Up to 247 characters can be entered in Place area When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 L ENESAS Page 196 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Description The folder name including the path is too long The folder name is more than 247 characters Make it within 247 characters The folder name is invalid The following The folder name with the invalid path is desig characters cannot be used lt gt nated The characters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name The folder name is invalid Specify a folder A folder inside the project folder is specified other than the project folder The folder that you will save the project is the The target project folder for packing is in the same to the project folder Set another place folder specified as the location to save the proj ect Example A project folder is specified as the top folder of the packing target and a folder above the project folder is specified as the loca tion to save the project
142. at ended last is held The extension of project files of CS for CC and CS for CA CX is common When a project file is double clicked CS detects its contents and then starts the suitable product and load the project If an attempt is made to open a project of CS for CA CX after CS for CC has been started the following Message dialog box is opened R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 11 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 2 Message Dialog Box fer ACA mig is mot a project far the CS fer CC open thie project by the proper 05 and ciosa this product F No is selected restore only file structure on this product and you can mot build Click Yes to end CS for CC and start CS for CA CX to load the project Click No to load the project by CS for CC without changing the CS Click Cancel to halt loading If No is clicked though a project is loaded by CS for CC it cannot be built or debugged Remark The plug ins other than the build tool debug tool and Editor panel are disabled by default the disabled plug ins are displayed in the Output panel Enable desired plug ins on the Additional Function tab in the Plug in Manager dialog box opened by selecting Tool menu gt gt Plug in Setting To reflect the new settings restart CS R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 12 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Create a Project A project is man
143. at is added to the project and is not described in the link order specification file is dis played in the end of File Caution 3 If a file with the same name exists check the location of the file in the popup display it will appear when you hover the mouse cursor over the file name To change the link order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names 3 Set the file link order Click the OK button in the Link Order dialog box to set the input order of the files to the linker 2 7 3 Change the build order of subprojects Builds are run in the order of subproject main project but when there are multiple subprojects added the build order of subprojects is their display order on the project tree To change the display order of the subprojects on the project tree drag the subproject to be moved and drop it on the desired location 2 4 Display a list of build options You can display the list of build options set currently on the build tool s Property panel for the project main project and subproject Select Build Options List from the Build menu The current settings of the options for the project will be displayed on the Build Tool tab from the Output panel in the build order Remark You can change the display format of the build option list Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Set the Format of build option list property in the O
144. ategory You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Open Folder with Explorer This menu is always disabled Windows Explorer Menu This menu is always disabled Remove from Project This menu is always disabled Copy This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Rename This menu is always disabled Property When a file is selected Compile Displays this node s property on the Property panel Compiles the selected C source file This menu is only displayed when a C source file except a non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Assemble Assembles the selected assembly source file This menu is only displayed when an assembly source file except a non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Execute in Python Console Opens the Python Console panel to execute the selected Python script file This menu is displayed only when a Python console script file is selected Open Opens the selected file with the application correspond
145. atement that shows the error origination if the mes sages that show the error origination are same they are listed together Technical Information Shows the name of the error method by each module name that the error occurred When displaying it the following icon is added Description ES Error or warning Error process or warning process Technical information e i u Character string that shows cause of error or warning Module name that error occurs Method name that error occurs b Buttons Expand All Expands all the node in the list Detail Version Information Opens the Detail Version Information dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 194 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Message dialog box dedicated items The following items are exclusive to Edit menu in Message dialog box other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected characters in the message area to the clipboard Select All Context menu Message area Copy Selects all the characters in the message area Copies the selected characters in the message area to the clipboard Select All Selects all the characters in the message area Help for Message Function buttons Displays the help with regard to the displayed message The following items are exclusive to Edit menu in Message dialog box other
146. ath of the Windows system folder is passed to the external tool e Use Output panel Displays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel Messages will be output to the Output panel s Too Name tab Tool Name is the string specified in Menu name Uses the Windows command prompt for messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr default f Input options at startup The Character String Inout opens enabling you to specify startup parameters for the new external tool d Does not specify startup parameters for the new external tool default g Output unicode text This item is only enabled if the Use Output panel check box is selected Displays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel using the Unicode character set Displays messages that the new external tool outputs to stdout and stderr in the Output panel using the ASCII character set default h Close window when command exit This item is disabled if the Use Output panel check box is selected Closes the Windows command prompt when the new external tool exits Leaves the Windows command prompt open after the new external tool exits default Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added
147. ation as a snapshot In the dialog box specify the item name to be displayed in this area maximum number of input characters 100 Note that the number of items that can be saved is 10 Deletes the selected snapshot Note that lt Latest result of profiling gt cannot be deleted 2 Build options about the selected memory mapping area The build options used when generating the items selected in the Profiled memory mapping list area are listed a Button Imports the build options except for individual options used at the time of profil ing the items selected in the Profiled memory mapping list area as the current build options Opens the Section Settings dialog box to edit the settings related to memory mapping by the build tool See CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build Tool Operation for details about the Section Settings dialog box 3 Details of the selected memory mapping area The detailed memory mapping information of the items selected in the Profiled memory mapping list area are dis played as a list Note that the display contents depend on the build option settings of the build tool in use This area has the following functions a Display the differential result Differences between the two sets of memory mapping information can be displayed The item selected in the Profiled memory mapping list area is the comparison destination and the item whose check box
148. be added to the project and specify the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the project And then click the OK button The file types to be displayed are as follows Project for the CC RH compiler C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Library file lib Object file obj Relocatable file rel Text file txt Project for the CC RX compiler C source file c C source file cpp cp cc Header file h hpp inc Assembler source file src s Jump table file jmp Symbol address file fsy Library file lib Object module file obj Relocatable file rel Text file txt R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 57 of 283 CS V3 00 00 Project for the CC RL compiler 2 FUNCTIONS C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Library file lib Object file obj Relocatable file rel Text file txt Debug dedicated project C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Object module file obj o Load module file abs Imf out Text file txt Remark You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The folder is added below the File node Note that o
149. below header6 h and header7 h are judged as no required for build comment include header6 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist comment include header7 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 65 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Make Settings for Build Operations This section explains operations on a build Import the build options of other project Set the link order of files Change the build order of subprojects Display a list of build options Change the build target project Add a build mode Change the build mode Delete a build mode Set the current build options as the standard for the project 2 7 1 Import the build options of other project You can import the build options of other project to the current project On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Import Build Options from the context menu The fol lowing message dialog box will open Figure 2 59 Message Dialog Box Are you sure you wand to import build options Current whol build options and build modes are replaced by specified propert values des Jil Jl bee Click Yes in the dialog box The Import Build Options dialog box will open Figure 2 60 Import Build Options Dialog Box Organice Mew Folder dl Windows Je DefautBuid di work sample mipj y CubeSuite ds sample de CefaultBu
150. box if the Editor panel has the focus and jumps to the specified line Opens the Go to the Location dialog box if the Disassemble panel SFR panel RL78 or IOR panel RH850 RX has the focus and jumps to the specified location Bookmark Displays a cascading menu for the bookmark R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 102 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Toggle Bookmark Insets deletes the bookmark on the current line Next Bookmark Moves a caret to the position of the next bookmark This menu is disabled in the following cases No bookmark is registered A bookmark is registered only in one line with a caret Previous Bookmark Moves a caret to the position of the previous bookmark This menu is disabled in the following cases No bookmark is registered A bookmark is registered only in one line with a caret Clear All Bookmarks Clears all the registered bookmarks This menu is disabled when no bookmark is registered List Bookmarks Opens the Bookmarks dialog box for displaying the list of bookmarks This menu is disabled when no bookmark is registered Outlining Displays a cascading menu for controlling expand and collapse states of source file outlining Collapse to Definitions Collapses all nodes that are marked as implementation blocks e g func tion definitions Toggle Outlining Expansion Toggles the curren
151. buttons Function buttons a i OK Carcel Help R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 165 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select the property corresponding with this dialog box on the Property panel and then click the button Description of each area 1 Text Edit texts in multiple lines By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected in this area Remark Up to 500 lines and 500 characters can be entered Note that the upper limit value is differing depending on the area that this dialog box is called from When the input violates any restriction the following message will be shown in the tooltip Message Description More than maximum number of restriction in the The numbers of input characters exceeds property that called this dialog box characters the maximum number of restriction in the cannot be specified The current number of char property that called this dialog box acters is displayed between brackets at the beginning of the line in excess of the limit 2 Placeholder The list of placeholders which can be specified for the area that this dialog box is called from is displayed ascend ing order Double click a row to surround the placeholder with percentage signs and display it in
152. by the build tool when a build rebuild or batch build is executed Rapid Build Displays the messages output by the build tool when a rapid build is exe cuted Debug Tool Displays the message output from the debug tool Code Generator Displays the messages output by the code generator Program Analyzer Displays the message output from the analyze tool Find References Displays a list of locations of references to functions variables output by the analyze tool See the CubeSuite Integrated Develooment Environment User s Manual Analysis for details about this tab Find and Replace Displays the Find In Files result with the Find and Replace dialog box All Messages Shows all the messages above by order of output Caution Tab is not automatically switched when a new message is output on the non selected tab If this is the case is added to the tab informing a new message Is output File menu Output panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Save Output tab name Saves the contents on the currently selecting tab in the previously saved text file txt see c Save of log When this menu is selected for the first time after launching the program the opera tion is equivalent to when selecting Save tab name As Note that this operation is invalid while building R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00
153. by the extension cssp and forms the subproject name Remark 2 When there is an existing project file with the same name in the location for creating the project file the file name has a number from 1 to 99 appended thus _n c Place Designate the location to create the project file by directly entering it with absolute path or selecting from the Browse button By default the old development environment project folder appears d Button Browse Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box When a folder is selected an absolute path of the folder is shown in Place Remark 1 The number of characters that can be entered in Project name and Place is up to 259 both for the path name and file name together Remark 2 When the input for Project name violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description The project name is invalid Enter charac The project file name uses characters that are not ters that can be used as a file name allowed The subproject name is invalid A sub In the specified location there is already a main project with the same name cannot be project with the same name excluding extension made in the location where the main proj ect exists Set the project name The project name is not specified Remark 3 When the input for Place violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description The file
154. ce file sym bol address file header file object file relocatable file and library file When a build target file has been added to or removed from the project When the link order of object module files and library files is changed When the property of the build tool or build target file is changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default Figure 2 83 Rapid Build Item When a rapid build is valid When a rapid build is invalid Build Build Gy Build Project F7 amp Bulld Project FF Ga Rebuild Project Shift F7 G Rebuild Project ShifteF Ged Clean Project E Clean Project Rapid Build Rapid Build 22 Update Dependencies E Build sample E Build sample 1 Rebuild sample 1 Rebuild sample _4 Clean sample _4 Clean sample Update Dependencies of sample Update Dependencies of sample a Set Link Order of sample Set Link Order of sample 4 Stop Build Ctri F 4 Stop Build Ctri F Ty Build Mode Settings Ty Build Mode Settings El Batch Build 1 Batch Build Dy Build Option List Ty Build Option List Remark 1 After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key Remark 2 Enable Disable setting of the rapid build applies to the entire project main project and subprojec
155. ce marks Whitespace marks such as space and tab are shown in the text editor Whitespace marks such as space and tab are not shown in the text editor default R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 223 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE d Enable line highlight for current Highlights the current line in the text editor Does not highlight the current line in the text editor default 2 General Use this area to configure general settings in the text editor a Enable syntax coloring Enables the coloring of keywords in the text editor that have supported file types default No coloring of keywords is displayed in the text editor Enables the smart edit function default Disables the smart edit function c Enable code outlining This ttem is only available if the Enable syntax coloring check box is selected Enables the code outlining feature in the text editor This enables the expansion and collapse of code blocks for file types that support it default Does not use the code outlining feature in the text editor Enables automatic determination of the encoding when a file is read default Disables automatic determination of the encoding when a file is read e Externally modified files This item allows you to specify the action to be taken for source files that are modified externally to the CS Prompt to reload th
156. cedure of build using CS A 1 Description Below is a list of the windows panels and dialog boxes related to the basic operations of CS and the procedure of build using CS Table A 1 Window Panel Dialog Box List Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Main window This is the start up window that opens when CS is launched Start panel This panel allows you to easily open a tutorial access create open a project or load a sample project Create Project dialog box This dialog box is used to create new projects or subprojects Project Convert Setting dialog box This dialog box includes the settings for conversion from e studio and the old development environment CubeSuite HEW PM project or workspace to a CS project Project Tree panel This panel is used to display components of the microcontroller build tool and source file of the project in tree view Change Microcontroller dialog box This dialog box is used to change the microcontroller to be used in the project Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project Property panel In this panel the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categorized Also the settings of the selected node can be chan
157. cond condition setting area bottom you can specify up to two condi tions Use the Logical operator buttons AND OR to set the two conditions as a single filter condition a Comparison value left drop down list You can either type the comparison value of for the filter number or string directly via the keyboard up to 2048 characters or select one from the input history via the drop down list maximum 10 items By default the comparison value set in the column currently b Condition right drop down list Select the condition for the comparison value specified in a above from the following drop down list By default the condition set in the column currently is selected Comparison Value Numerical Value Character String no condition The comparison value will be ignored not set as a filter condition R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 182 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Comparison Value Numerical Value Character String equals Compared as numerical value Compared as character string does not equal is greater than is greater than or equal to is less than is less than or equal to begins with Compared as character string does not begin with ends with does not end with contains does not contain 2 Logical operator buttons Select the logical relationship holding between the conditions specified in the First c
158. converted to the CS project PM projects are converted to CS projects according to the rules below A PM project is converted to a project with the same name as the original project After conversion the project file name will be project name mtpj Remark When reading a project without build tools specified build tools are set according to the microcon troller Caution Only projects that can be loaded by PM and built normally can be loaded into CS Remark 1 The target for conversion is the file structure information of the PM project file and the build mode build options information The build mode and build options information is not the target for conversion if the build tool is different from the PM project file Remark 2 When build options have been added from the version of the target build tools in the PM project to the version of the build tools after conversion the added options are set to the build tools default values after conversion Remark 3 The project files after conversion are created in the folder the PM project file was placed in If there is already a project file with the same name _number_ number 1 2 will be added to the file name Remark 4 After conversion the build mode will have the same name as that of a PM project Any characters that are not allowed in a CS folder name however lt gt will be replaced by underscores _ If there is another build
159. crocontroller node is selected Change Microcontroller Opens the Change Microcontroller dialog box to change the microcontroller When multiple Microcontroller nodes for the projects using the same micro controller are selected the microcontroller settings can be changed at one time Property Displays the selected microcontroller s property in Property panel When a Build Tool node is selected Build Project Runs a build the selected project main project or subproject A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild the selected project main project or subproject A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Runs a clean of the selected project main project or subproject A clean of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set to Default Build Option for Project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 Sets the current build options as the standard for the project When a subproj ect is added its setting is not made When the build option that is different from the standard option is set its prop erty is displayed in boldface ENESAS Page 136 of 283 CS V3 00 00
160. ct is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rapid build Toggles the rapid build function between enabled default and disabled Build active project Runs a build of the active project If the active project is the main project a build of its subproject is not run When a dependent project is set for the active project a build of the depen dent project is also run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Runs a rebuild of the active project If the active project is the main project a rebuild of its subproject is not run When a dependent project is set for the active project a rebuild of the dependent project is also run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project If the active project is the main project a clean of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Stop Build Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Build Mode Settings Opens the Build Mode Seitings dialog box to modify and add to the build mode Batch Build Opens the Batch Build dialog box to run a batch build Build Option List Lists the currently set build options in the Output panel f Debug See the CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug Tool
161. cted projects The execution result of the cleans is displayed on the Output panel After the cleans are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 191 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to display how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place This dialog box automatically closes when the process in progress is done Figure A 31 Progress Status Dialog Box a O Losdine project 2 Function buttons _ The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open The dialog box automatically opens when a message is output while the time consuming process is in progress Description of each area 1 Message display area Displays the message output while process is in progress edit not allowed 2 Progress bar The progress bar shows the current progress of the process in progress with the bar length When the process is 100 done the bar gets to the right end this dialog box automatically closed Function buttons Button Function Cancel Cancels the process in progress and closes th
162. d File name Displays the file name of the file to save the information on the subproject Default Name of the subproject file How to change Changes not allowed Relative path Displays the relative path of the subproject file to which subproject information is saved from the location of the main project This property is shown only when the subproject is selected in Project Tree panel Note that if the relative path does not exist such as the case that the main project and subproject are in the different drive it is not displayed Default Relative path from the main project How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path Displays the absolute path of the subproject file to save the information on them Default Absolute name of subprojects How to change Changes not allowed Save with absolute Select whether to save the subproject information to a subproject file using the abso path lute path Default No How to change Select a value from the drop down list Restriction Saves the file using the absolute path Saves the file using the relative path R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 152 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Notes The detailed information on records is displayed and their configuration can be changed Add memos to subprojects Memo is added one item in one line The added memos are displayed as subproperty
163. d or Clean button Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run 2 8 5 Compile assemble individual files You can just compile or assemble for each source file added to the project 1 When compiling a C source file Select the C source file on the project tree and select the Compile from the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 80 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 85 Compile Item oe File a El Build tool generated fil 1 Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer A Windows Explorer Menu Add pi Remove from Project shit Delete Ctrl C Ctrl4 2 When assembling an assembly source file Select the assembly source file on the project tree and select the Assemble from the context menu Figure 2 86 Assemble Item a Fite T Build tool generated files a S system src gt y e 4 Open with Intemal Editar e Open with Selected Application EE Open Folder with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Add J Remove from Project Shift Delete a Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V me Change Extension Property R20UT3101EJ0100
164. d tool is in operation Runs a rebuild of the project A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation DefaultBuild Changes the current build modes for projects main project and subprojects simulta neously All build modes that exist in the current project main project and subprojects are displayed in this drop down list The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same it will be blank The build mode that exists only in part of the project is shown with the mark When the build mode with mark is selected and it does not exist in the project DefaultBuild will be duplicated and set with the selected build mode name Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation c Bookmark toolbar Bookmark toolbar shows buttons operating bookmarks on the active Editor panel Note that this toolbar is disabled when the Editor panel does not have focus and the debug tool is connected in mixed display mode Insets deletes the bookmark on the current line Moves a caret to the position of the previous bookmark This button is disabled in the following cases No bookmark is registered A bookmark is registered only in one line with a caret R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7t
165. dModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the main project folder MainProjectName Replaces with the main project name MicomToolPath Replaces with the absolute path of the install folder of this product ProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder ProjectName Replaces with the project name TempDir Replaces with the absolute path of the temporary folder WinDir Replaces with the absolute path of the Windows system folder When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed when running a build The placeholders can be described in the script Default Commands executed in the project building 0 How to Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the change button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 commands can be specified Commands executed in Specify the commands to be executed when running a clean see E 5 3 Runa the project cleaning clean of the debug dedicated project The following placeholders are supported ActiveProjectDir Replaces with the absolute path of the active project folder ActiveProjectName Replaces with the active project name BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name MainProjectDir
166. ded herein Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is granted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from such alteration modification copy or otherwise misappropriation of Renesas Electronics product Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following two quality grades Standard and High Quality The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots etc High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems and safety equipment etc Renesas Electronics products are neither int
167. dent on the environment of the PC in use Remark 2 If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build rebuild or batch build then all these files are saved 2 Speeding up of build Two types of facilities are provided to speed up build simultaneous build and parallel build The build time can be shortened in simultaneous build by simultaneously compiling or assembling the files with a single call of the build command and in parallel build by executing multiple build commands in parallel R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 75 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS See CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build Tool Operation for details 3 Displaying execution results The execution results of the build output messages of the build tool are displayed in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build gt All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build gt Rapid Build tab Figure 2 78 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build Load LL BF ait da ees kis HE lke ee YK EESTEEENNE h Start build sub PefauliBuild J Def quilt Bal bids IIb Library Gererstor Completed disco intpre c reactore c sbrk c a c verithl c J Daf aul Bui ld sub aba Default Bui bd sue we Renesas Oplimizing Linker Completed Build endead Errorz0 Warming 0 sub DefauliBulld J Start build sanple DefaultBuild
168. dialog box and converts a project according to the designated condition Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 126 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel is used to display components of the microcontroller build tool and source file of the project in tree view Figure A 6 Project Tree Panel Toolbar 4 RSF51111AxFL Microcontroller aj code Generator Design Tool A Pin View 7 22 Peripheral Functions Code Preview a CC RX Build Tool pa RX Simulator Debug Tool 22 Program Analyzer Analyze Tool E 3 File Fl Build tool generated files abt samples abs mt sample3 mot rar sample3 map ES dbsct c UE Ed intprg c l 6 resetprg c E sample c j Sbrk c E vecttbl c ul iodefine h BY sbrk h Al stacksct h A typedefine h Ll vect h e i sub Subproject MEL RSF563NACKFB Microcontroller Au CC AX Build Tool EN RX Simulator Debug Tool CP Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 3 1 File The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Toolbar Edit menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Help menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 127 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 How to open From the Vie
169. dicated project The file is added below the File node C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Text file txt All files The project tree after adding the file and folder will look like the one below Figure 2 49 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c i RSFSG3NACKFB Microcontroller A CC AX Build Tool E RX Simulator Debug Tool Figure 2 50 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src e OC RX Build Tool de RX Simulator Debug Tool D 9 File Remark The location of the file added below the File node depends on the current file display order setting See 2 6 5 Change the file display order for the method of changing the file display order R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 CENESAS Page 59 of 283 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Caution 1 If the paths differ you can add source files with the same name Note however that if the setting of the output file name is left as the default the output files will have the same name which will prevent the build from running correctly for example when adding D sample1 func c and D sample2 func c the default output file name for these files is both func obj To avoid this problem set the output file name for each of those files to a different name with the individ ual build options for the source files Changing the name of the C source file is made with the Object module file name propert
170. displays detail version information of this product and the present project information Figure A 62 Detail Version Information Dialog Box The riormeti n of paoi files the informabon of source iles sre opal Ramore hese rlormatan A ther re a col dential proble Stem Information Weng ion Micrel lindos Enterprise CServics Pack 1 6 1 7501 86 Lenguees A Ree 0 HET Frameveark Were Blicroso t HET Framework 4 KEQ999855 Windows HP SP Server 2003 SPP SY Vista S5P2 server 2006 SPI y 7 SP1 r Server 2006 Fa SP 4050514102 Application kdor matic 1 Product Hama for CO Package Vartin Mono kx soo soon ayara Wasia a xxx ox zAnemby Yera ERR Prodacs License Function buttons a The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu Detail Version Information dialog box dedicated items Context menu Function buttons How to open From the Help menu select Detail Version Information Click the Detail Version Information button in the Message dialog box Description of each area 1 Information text area Show the detail version information of this product and the present project information The necessary information is as follows R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 252 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Information System Information OS Version Language NET
171. ds Help Opens the help for this product Open Help for Target Opens the help corresponding to the window panel dialog box error mes sage or other object that currently has focus One Point Advice Opens the One Point Advice dialog box Tutorial Opens the tutorial for this product Browse Renesas Electronics Opens our microcontroller website in the web browser Microcontrollers Web Detail Version Information Shows the Detail Version Information dialog box Check for Updates Opens the CS Update Manager window and begin checking for updates About Product name Opens the Version Information dialog box 2 Toolbar The toolbar shows common command buttons Buttons on the toolbar can be customized in User Setting dialog box You can also create a new toolbar in the same dialog box a Start amp Save In the Start 8 Save the button group concerning the start button the file operation and the edit is displayed Opens the Start panel Opens the Open File dialog box for opening files and projects Saves the file that is currently in focus Saves all files being updated in the Editor panel and the project Cuts the selection and copy it into the clipboard Copies the selection into the clipboard R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 109 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Ep Pastes the contents of the clipboard ie Undoes th
172. e Ay OC RX Build t Rebuild sample El RX Simulator Clean sample E L File E Open Folder with Explorer H Windows Explorer Menu Add y E Set sub as Active Project Remove from Project Shift Delete G4 Paste Ctri Rename FR El Property R20UT3101EJO100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS STETE Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 5 Change the project name You can change the name of the project main project or subproject on the project tree Select the Project node or Subproject node and select Rename on the context menu oe 2 22 Rename Item For a Project Seec sample Project Mm RSFSBINAC hal Build sample A CC RX Build 4 Rebuild sample SN RX Simulator 4 Clean sample E Y File 31 Open Folder with Explorer ll Windows Explorer Menu Add Set sample as Active Project 7 Save Project and Development Tools as Package A Paste Ctrl W EP Property Remark After changing the project name when you save the project the actual name of the project file is also changed 2 4 6 Open a project folder in Explorer You can open the folder where the project file for a project main project or subproject is saved from the project tree in Explorer Select the Project node or Subproject node and select Open Folder with Explorer on the context menu Figure 2 23 Open Folder with Explorer Item For a Project A RSESEMAC ul Build sample A CC RX Build 4 Rebuild sample e RX
173. e GO button to open the Open Project dialog box And then select an e studio CubeSuite HEW PM project or workspace and click the Open button R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 122 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project This area displays the conversion target project configuration tree Select the project for carrying out the conver sion settings Description node When you make the selection the area on the right shows a summary of operations in this dialog box Main project node Indicates that this is the main project for the conversion target project When selected the area on the right shows the main project setting items Subproject node Indicates that this is the subproject for the conversion target project When selected the area on the right shows the subproject setting items Remark 1 Holding down the Ctrl key and selecting a main project node and subproject node allows you to make a multiple project setting Remark 2 Selecting a main project node and then pressing the key allows you to expand the selected node Selecting a main project node and then pressing the Shift key allows you to collapse the selected node Remark 3 For the following conversions subproject nodes do not appear In an e studio project In a CubeSuite project when there are no subprojects In a HEW workspace when there is only one
174. e Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Open Folder with Explorer Opens a shortcut to the folder that has been set for the selected category in the Explorer This menu item will be invalid if a shortcut to the folder has not been made Windows Explorer Menu Shows the Windows Explorer menu for a shortcut to the folder that has been set for the selected category This menu item will be invalid if a shortcut to the folder has not been made Remove from Project Removes the selected Category node from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected Category node to the clipboard When t
175. e When a file open in the text editor is modified externally to the CS a message dia file log box will be displayed which asks you whether you wish to reload the file or not default If you click the Yes button on the message dialog box this will reload the file from disk losing all current changes to that file in the text editor If you click the No button on the message dialog box this will ignore the external changes and any existing modifications to that file in the text editor will remain Always reload the file This will automatically reload the file when it is modified externally Never reload the file This will ignore any externally modified changes to source files and will not reload the file f Default file encoding This option is for the default file encoding that should be used when creating a new file in the Editor panel and automatic determination of encoding is disabled In addition this encoding is used when the file being opened has a file encoding that cannot be detected or is not supported in the Editor panel currently Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Default encoding of the current OS default Most recently used encodings maximum 4 Popular encodings for current locale e g for U
176. e command selected under Commands if no keys area assigned then None appears To change the assigned shortcut key select a key from the following drop down list and then click the Assign button None Shift F1 to F12 Ctrl Shift 0 to 9 Insert Ctrl Insert Ctrl Shift A to Z Delete Ctrl Delete Ctrl Shift F1 to F12 F1 to F12 Ctrl 0 to 9 Alt Backspace Alt F1 to F12 Shift Insert Ctrl A to Z Alt Left Shift Delete Ctrl F1 to F12 Alt Up Current assigned to displays the command currently assigned to the shortcut key specified in the Specify a Shortcut area if no commands are assigned to this key then None appears 3 Description area This area displays a popup describing the function of the command selected under Commands Function buttons Button Function Assigns the shortcut key selected under Commands to the command selected under the Specify a Shortcut area Note however that this button will be disabled if the key selected in the Specify a Shortcut area is already assigned to another command Remove Removes the assignment of the shortcut key selected under the Specify a Short cut area to the command selected under Commands None will appear in the Specify a Shortcut area drop down list Note however that this button will be disabled if no keys have been assigned to the command selected under Commands Reset All Resets
177. e file the project is converted in accordance with the following rules The HEW workspace is not converted A HEW project will be converted into a main project or Subproject depending on the inter project dependencies described in the workspace file If there are no inter project dependencies then the projects will be added to the project tree in the order they appear in the workspace file If there are inter project dependencies then the first project to appear that is not dependent on any other proj ects will be the main project Subprojects are built in the order that they appear in the project tree Thus projects are added to the project tree in the reverse of the dependency order Example 1 If projects A B C D have no inter dependencies HEW workspace before conversion CS project after conversion Workspace Main project A Project A Subproject B Project B Subproject C Project C Subproject D Project D Example 2 If project C depends on project A and projects B and D have no dependencies HEW workspace before conversion CS project after conversion Workspace Main project B Project A Subproject A Project B Subproject C Project C Subproject D Project D HEW s placeholders which are used in build options are replaced with CS s placeholders However the con verted placeholder may not indicate the correct information because the concepts differ between HEW and CS Change the build options if nec
178. e in the name of the executable file including absolute path for the external text editor directly via the keyboard up to 259 characters or click the Browse button and in the Select External Text Editor dialog box specify the name of the executable file This item is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected 3 Startup options Specify the startup options without the line number for the external text editor up to 256 characters This item is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected The following placeholders can be specified by the O button If you wish to specify more than one option separate them by spaces FileName Passes the name of the file to display to the external text editor FilePath Passes the absolute path of the file to display to the external text editor R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 204 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE FileRelativePath Passes the absolute path of the file from the project folder to display to the external text editor Line Passes the caret position line number to the external text editor 4 Startup options with line number Specify the startup options with the line number for the external text editor up to 256 characters This item is only enabled if the Use external text editor check box is selected The following placeholders can be specified by the i button
179. e last action Er Redoes an undone action w Opens the Find and Replace dialog box or the Trace Search dialog box if the Trace panel has focus or the Memory Search dialog box if the Memory panel has focus and perform the specified search da Searches backward in the panel being searched using the specified parameters da Searches forward in the panel being searched using the specified parameters fs Pressing the Enter key leads to the execution of a quick search for the specified word Note Zooms in and out on the display of the panel that currently has focus The zoom percentage 25 to 300 is specified by selecting it from the drop down list or directly entering the value into the text box It is also possible to zoom in and out on the display by moving the mouse wheel for ward or backward while holding down the Ctrl key Note The find including Quick Find and replace conditions are individually set for the Output panel and Editor panel Accordingly for example when finding of a word with the Editor panel active proceeds after find ing in the Output panel if the find and replace conditions in use are different the string found in the Output panel may not be found in the Editor panel b Build toolbar Build toolbar shows buttons used in build process Runs a build of the project A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the buil
180. e like and drop it onto the Download files node on the project tree Figure E 4 Project Tree Panel Adding a Load Module File Project Tree Only Project PA RIFTOLOLOXAFP Microcontroller 4 None Build Tool SS RHESO Simulato Drop a load module file here fies 2 Creating and adding an empty file Select the Download files node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 262 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 5 Add File Dialog Box Adding a Load Module File add File File typa G source file tc Header tile h me Assemble file t asri 5 Text file bet All fiesta All tiles File pame File location Lor Cee bee i by In the dialog box specify the file name to be created newly and the location in which it is created and then click the OK button The project tree after adding the load module file will look like the one below Figure E 6 Project Tree Panel After Adding Load Module File a out 3 18 Debugonte Project FA R7F701010xAFP Microcontroller A None Build Tool ax RHE50 Simulator Debug Tool sample abs E 3 2 Add C source files and other files Add C source files to be used for creation of the download file to the debug dedicated project By adding the C source file to the
181. e link order settings and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 187 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Figure A 29 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Bulld Mode Settings selected build mode Burid mode list LST Duolicate Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Build Mode Settings Description of each area 1 Selected build mode area This area displays the build mode selected in the Build mode list area a Button Apply to All Set the build mode of the main project and all subprojects of the currently opened project to the currently displayed build mode 2 Build mode list area This area displays all build modes that exist in the currently opening project main project and subproject in a list The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same DefaultBuild will be selected The build mode that exists only in part of the main project and subproject is shown with the mark Note that the DefaultBuild is the default build mode and is always displayed at the top a
182. e selected project subproject file and Category node Press Enter key to confirm the rename Press the ESC key to cancel When the file is selected the actual file name is also changed When the selected file is added to other project those file names are also changed Note that this menu is only enabled when the project subproject file other than the dependency files and Category node is selected Note that rename is dis abled when the build tool is operating Help menu Project Tree panel dedicated items Open Help for Project Tree Panel Displays the help of this panel Context menu 1 When a Project node is selected Build Actively project Builds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not built When a dependent project is set for the active project a build of the depen dent project is also run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Actively project Rebuilds the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not rebuilt When a dependent project is set for the active project a rebuild of the depen dent project is also run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Actively project Cleans the active project If the active project is the main project its subproject is not cleaned Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation
183. e will take precedence If the plug in specified by this option does not exist it will be ignored If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end Start CS without displaying the Main window and with loading all plugins in the Plugins folder If this is specified together with the np or lp option then this option will take precedence When a plugin is specified together with the npall option the option specified backward of the command line will take precedence If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end npAplug in name plug in name R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 Start CS without displaying the Main window and without loading the speci fied plugins in the Plugins folder In plug in name specify the name of the folder in which each DLL file is saved Note that folder names are case insensitive You can specify multiple plug in names by separating them with commas You can also specify the np option itself multiple times Each DLL will not be loaded When a plug in with the same name is specified for the lp option the option specified backward of the command line will take precedence If the plug in specified by this option does not exist it will be ignored If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end ENESAS Page 94 of 283 CS V3 00 00 2
184. eSuite exe or CubeSuiteW exe located in the CS installation folder 1 When executing CubeSuite exe If you execute CubeSuite exe you can launch CS load plug ins and execute builds without displaying the Main window The format to specify on the command line is shown below CubeSuitet exeA bb br bcb bcA build mode name A npAplug in name plug in name A npall JA lpAplug in name plug in name JA lpall A plug in optionA plug in parameter Aproject file name A One or more spaces Can be omitted When options are separated by pipeline characters any one of the options can be specified Pattern in proceeding can be repeated Each option is described below Description None Launch CS without displaying the Main window and exit without performing any actions bbA build mode name Execute a build Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in specified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is per formed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project specified by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild I
185. eate Project Microcontroller Using merocontroller Ma Search microcontroller Update Fa RHESNEIL Produet Name AVF 701201 i GUE enc meen tema ROM atre KEytas Y RIFTOIS BGAZSIOFPITBOFP 44 Code Hash Gets Flash fd a RHIS0 E1M S Bytes y REESE FOCT RAM PE1 49152 Additional Information Number of Corea 2 Kind of project Boot Loader for Multi core CC RH Propact pame input the name of the project here Place Calker boococococo Documenta e Browse Make the project folder itis shown absolute path of a project file do create w Create an apobcation project with a boot loader project Set the items in the order below 1 2 Confirm the microcontroller type RH850 is selected on Microcontroller Select the microcontroller Select the microcontroller to use in the project on the Using microcontroller area If your microcontroller is not in the Using microcontroller area click the Update button You can open the CS Update Manager window and check for microcontroller information updates via the net work Caution The Update button is only enabled when this product is installed using the installer It is disabled when a packaged item is being used Confirm the project type Boot Loader for Multi core CC RH is selected on Kind of project Specify the project name and location to create the project file Speci
186. ect Rapid Build Update Dependencies Build DebugOnly Rebuild Debugonly Clean DebugOnly Update Dependencies of DebugOnly Set Link Order of DebugOnhy Stop Build Ctrl F Build Mode Settings Batch Build Build Option List This function is valid only when editing source files with the Editor panel After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key Enable Disable setting of the rapid build applies to the entire project main project and subprojects If you disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time A batch build is a function that builds rebuilds and cleans are run in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 277 of 283 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 34 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Bulld al Build mode list Project Burd mode Deimed macros FJ sample DefauhBuild M sample BuildMade sub DefauhBuild sub BEuiidMode ei Sten ole Ce In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project and their build modes and macro definitions Defined macros is invalid when the target project is a debug dedi cated project is displayed
187. ect and 2 4 2 Add an existing subproject for how to add subprojects R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 27 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Manipulate a Project This section describes how to manipulate a project 2 4 1 Open a project Use the following method to open a project Open an existing project Open a recently used project Open a project from the favorites menu 1 Open an existing project Existing projects are opened by specifying the project file From the Project menu select Open Project the Open Project dialog box will open Figure 2 15 Open Project Dialog Box E Ope 7 robert 4 Gi work sampe Seneca Al Organize New Folder l de Windows DefaultBuild de work LS complet de sarmple de DefaultEuikd de sample J Users TR Ga Local Disk Cr ce Local Disk Q Fille name sample mtpj Project File ntgj 7 On the dialog box specify the project file and click the Open button Remark When CS is not running you can start CS and load a project by double clicking on that project in Explorer 2 Open a recently used project You can directly open the most recently used projects from the most recent to the fourth most recent from the menu From the File menu select Recent Projects the path of the recently used projects will display in a cascading menu in order from most recent to fourth most recent Select the project yo
188. ed during building Information on the detailed version of this product or the current project Remark 3 The quality report file is output with the file name QualityReport oroject name build mode name text to the project folder of each project If a file having the same name exists it will be overwritten It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node 4 Stop build when the number of error exceed the limit Stops the build if the total number of errors at the build reaches the number specified in Upper limit Does not stop the build even if the total number of errors at the build reaches the number specified in Upper limit default a Upper limit Specify the upper limit of the number of errors Either enter a number between 1 and 10000 directly via the keyboard or specify a number via the E buttons The default is 100 Note that clicking on the OK or Apply button while this item remains blank causes the tab setting to remain at the previously saved value Remark This item is only enabled if the Stop build when the number of error exceed the limit check box is selected 5 Timing of updating dependencies Select the timing for automatically updating dependencies from the drop down list of either of the following At the first build Updates dependencies immediately before executing the first build after opening the project default At every build Updates depende
189. ed in the Main window When this dialog box is open any button on a toolbar or any menu item in a menu bar currently displayed in the Main window can be dragged and dropped to the desired position to change the sequence of buttons or menu items or perform button menu item deletion Caution While this dialog box is open you cannot use functions of toolbars menus You can use these functions as usual after you close this dialog box Figure A 52 User Setting Dialog Box Toolbars E Start and Save Layout View Panels Bookmark 4 Program Analyzer Stack Usage Tracer Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select User Setting Description of each area 1 Tab selection area Tab selection allows you to switch between the customization targets This dialog box has the following tabs Toolbars tab Commands tab 2 Customization area You can set detailed customization conditions For details of displayed items setting method see the description of each tab R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 RENESAS Page 235 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Keyboard Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Close Cancels the toolbar menu customization
190. edicated project Files registered to the project are displayed directly below the File node This is a node for adding download files to the project Note that this node is shown only when the project type is a debug dedicated project Build tool generated files Hereafter referred to as Build tool generated files node This node is created during a build Files created by the build tools are displayed directly below the node except for object files Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project Startup RL78 Hereafter referred to as Startup node Category name Hereafter referred to as Category node Subproject name Subproject Hereafter referred to as Subproject node This is a node for adding other than standard startup files to the project This node is always shown under the File node Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project These user defined categories are used to classify files into modules Subprojects added to the project For subprojects see 2 Projects and subprojects Only the tools corresponding to the microcontroller in use are shown When more than one component are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is When more than one file are selected and their common properties are different that field is left Remark 1 Remark 2 displayed blank Remark 3 Project
191. een changed Remark The file names are all displayed in boldface right after the project is opened The boldface dis play is canceled after a build is executed s Highlighting the non build target file The file that is set as non build target is highlighted as shown in the example below Build target file Non build target file t Highlighting overlay icons Overlay icons of Windows Explorer set in a project a file added to the project and a category only when a shortcut to the folder is set is displayed on the left side of the ordinal icon as the example below The project that has not been changed UR sample Project The project displaying an overlay icon ie LA sample Project Caution The above overlay icon is provided as a sample Note that an icon to be displayed differs depending on the tools in use The display of overlay icons is updated on the following timings When the project is loaded When on the toolbar is clicked When Refresh is selected from the Edit menu Remark This function is valid only when this product is activated while the Show overlay icons for Win dows Explorer in project tree check box in the General Display category of the Option dialog box is selected R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 132 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE u Highlighting the category in which a shortcut to a folder is set The category in which a shortcut to
192. eholders can be specified by the O button If you wish to specify more than one option separate them by spaces FileName The name of the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool FilePath The absolute path of the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool FileRelativePath The absolute path from the project folder of the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool Line If the file currently selected in the Project Tree panel is being edited in the Editor panel then the line on which the caret is located is passed if the Editor panel does not have focus then 1 is passed OutputFile The program passes to the external tool the name of the module file with absolute path that is output when the project for the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is built if there is no selection then nothing is passed d Startup folder Specify the absolute path to the folder for launching the external tool up to 247 characters The following placeholders can be specified by the O button If you wish to specify more than one folder separate them by spaces ActiveProjectDir The absolute path of the active project folder of the item currently selected in the Project Tree panel is passed to the external tool if the active project does not exist then nothing is passed ActiveProjectN
193. el RL78 IOR panel RH850 RX CPU Register Trace Shows the CPU Register panel Shows the Trace panel IECUBE Full soec emulator Simulator Disassemble Displays a cascading menu for opening a Disassemble panel Disassemble1 Disassemble2 Shows the Disassemble 1 panel Shows the Disassemble 2 panel Disassemble3 Shows the Disassemble 3 panel Disassemble4 Event Shows the Disassemble 4 panel Shows the Events panel Show Current PC Location Shows the current PC location in the Editor panel If there is no source information or source file at the PC location it is shown in a Disassemble panel If the Editor or Disassemble panel to show the location is already visible then the focus will move to that panel Back to Last Cursor Position Returns to the last location before moving to the defined location Forward to Next Cursor Posi tion Goes to the move destination Python Console Shows the Python Console panel Tag Jump R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and column ENESAS Page 105 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Save or Restore Docking Lay Displays commands relating to saving and restoring the docking layout in a out cascading menu Save Layout 1 Saves the docking layout in slot 1 This layout can be restored via the Restore Layout 1
194. elf multiple times Each DLL will be loaded When a plug in with the same name is specified for the np option the option specified backward of the command line will take precedence If the plug in specified by this option does not exist it will be ignored Start CS displaying the Main window with loading all plug ins in the Plugins folder If an invalid option is specified it will be ignored npAplug in Start CS displaying the Main window without loading the specified plugins in name plug in the Plugins folder name In plug in name specify the name of the folder in which the DLL file is saved Note that folder names are case insensitive You can specify multiple plug in names by separating them with commas You can also specify the np option itself multiple times Each DLL will not be loaded When a plug in with the same name is specified for the lp option the option specified backward of the command line will take precedence If the plug in specified by this option does not exist it will be ignored Start CS displaying the Main window without loading any of the specified plug ins in the Plugins folder If an invalid option is specified it will be ignored nopro3 Start CS displaying the Main window without reading in a project either a project specified on the command line or the last used project nrs If CS is already started and in the standby state using rapid start see 2 2 Start C
195. en clicking the change button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 158 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE File Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on each file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Notes Figure A 15 Property Panel File Information Tab Property 4 Mone Property a A SiS 4 Build Mode End mode Default Build a Build Commands executed in the project building Commands executed in the project building 0 Gommends executed m the project cleaning Gommends executed in the project clanmell Hote Build mode Selects ihe build mode name to be used diring build Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file is displayed and the configuration can be changed File name The file name is displayed Change the file name on the project tree Default file name How to change Changes not allowed Relative path The relative path from the project folder is displayed Default The relative path from the project folder How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path The absolute path of the file is displayed Default The absolute path of the
196. ended nor authorized for use in products or systems that may pose a direct threat to human life or bodily injury artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations etc or may cause serious property damages nuclear reactor control systems military equipment etc You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for which the product is not intended by Renesas Electronics You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products
197. ension different from the one selected in the File type area is designated the one selected in the File type area will be added for example if you designate aaa txt as the file name and select C source file c as the file type the file is named as aaa txt c Note that if All files is selected in the File type area no extension will be added 3 File location area Designate the location to be created the file by directly entering its path or selecting from the Refer button The path of the project folder is displayed by default R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 143 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE However when this dialog box is opened from the context menu in the Category node only when a shortcut to the folder has been made and the folder exists the path to the folder specified in the category is displayed a Button Refer Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box If a folder is selected the path will be added in the text box Remark 1 If the text box is blank it is assumed that the project folder is designated Remark 2 If the relative path is designated the reference point of the path is the project folder Remark Up to 259 characters path and file name combined can be specified in the File name area and File location area When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown on the File name area in the tooltip Message Descr
198. enus This is enabled only when a menu item is selected Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed Image and Text Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item but ton by both text and icon Begin a Group Inserts separator just before the selected menu item button Recently Used Figure A 59 Add Command Dialog Box Add Command Ohvose the command to add and cick OR Categories A Commands Ela Vey Budd Project Project Tree Edit Jump Cammarris E Ext UER ie Project Tree ESP Property This item is not supported in this version a o i a R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 247 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Restores the arrangement of menu items or toolbar buttons belonging to the cat egory currently selected in the Choose a menu or toolbar to rearrange area to its default state Finishes the arrangement of commands and closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 248 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Other Windows dialog box This dialog box is used to select one of the divide panels shown in the Main window to activate or close Figure A 60 Other Windows Dialog Box mm LEI y PR E AAA AA A i A A 1 Function b
199. environment and you can perform builds linked to an external build tool by executing these commands from CS The operational sequence for using a debug dedicated project is described below Figure E 1 Operational Sequence for Using a Debug dedicated Project Creating a debug dedicated project Settings of the download file Executing builds linked to an external build tool Settings of commands Running a build Debug phase 1 See E 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project 2 See E 3 Add a File to a Project 3 See E 4 Make Settings for Build Operations 4 See E 5 Run a Build 5 See the CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug Tool Caution The design tool code generator and the analyze tool are not available for a debug dedicated project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 L ENESAS Page 260 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 2 Create a Debug dedicated Project The creation of a debug dedicated project is performed with the Create Project dialog box that is opened by selecting Create New Project from the Project menu or Add gt gt Add New Subproject from the context menu after selecting the Project node on the project tree as well as the method of creating a project described in 2 3 2 Create a new project or 2 3 3 Add a new subproject To create a debug dedicated project however specify Debug Only with the Kind of project item on
200. er Completed InfornationJBuild Tool Hild endediError B Warning atrx_ecanple Default Builis lafornation Build Tool FndedtSuccess 1 Projects Failed FPerojects Thureday July 31 2814 11 51 79 FH AO DO DO O O E a a Program Piles Rhenesas Electronics Cf 2 When executing CubeSuiteW exe Execute CubeSuiteW exe to launch CS displaying the Main window and with plugins loaded in the same man ner as when launching it from the Start menu The format to specify on the command line is shown below CubeSuiteW exeA npAplug in name plug in name A npall A lpAplug in name plug in name A lpall JA noproj JA nrs A plug in optionA plug in parameter Aproject file name l A One or more spaces Can be omitted Pattern in proceeding can be repeated Each option is described below R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 95 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Description None Start CS with the Main window displayed in the same manner as when launching it from the Start menu lpAplug in Start CS displaying the Main window with loading the specified plugins in name plug in the Plugins folder name In plug in name specify the name of the folder in which the DLL file is saved Note that folder names are case insensitive You can specify multiple plug in names by separating them with commas You can also specify the Ip option its
201. erent drive then it appears as the absolute path Remark 2 Object module files which are generated from newly added source files and newly added object module files are added after the last object module file in the list Newly added library files are added to the end of the list R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 186 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Remark 3 When the file is dragged and dropped the multiple files that are next to each other can be selected together a Button Moves the selected file to up If any file is not selected this button will be disabled Moves the selected file to down If any file is not selected this button will be disabled Opens the Select Import File dialog box The description order of the file names is acquired from the selected link order specification file and then it is reflected in File If nothing is displayed in File this button will be disabled Opens the Select Export File dialog box Outputs the list of the file names displayed in File to the specified link order speci fication file If nothing is displayed in File this button will be disabled Remark See 2 7 2 Set the link order of files for the method of using the link order specification file Function buttons Button Function OK Sets the input order of the files to the linker as the display order in File and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels th
202. ert a PM project into a CS project for details Next specify the saved project file in this area Remark 1 When the version of the build tool used in the source project is different from the version of the build tool in the project to be created it is automatically diverted the case that Debug Only is specified with Kind of project is excluded An image of the dialog box after setting the items is shown below R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 20 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS ies 2 7 Create Project Dialog Box After Setting Items Lema merocorimiler Ars homer nailer Llica lia ly GEN Product Mame RSF Sb SN ACE On chip ROM eco Bytes T q OS cal On chip RAM CST BAR Ay inn ils inal gt SF ERINAC POL eh hiwmor Packses PLOPO ILE AA E PSFSRINACKFPT IO pin FSF SNACK tpl E FAFGCIMACS LES Son E FSFSEIHAC LE ten Kid of project Application i Pid Project naime carla Place rr hk if Mass the project folder Coki amp sample ipj O Para fe file compocidi n of nes bag prometo the rar projeti Project lo bo pasto act eto be creta epr composta files in de diverted protect joker do s ren poeci lokar When you click the Create button the project file is created in the location specified in 4 and the structure of the cre ated project is displayed as a tree in the Project Tree panel Figure 2 8 Project Tree Panel After Creating a New Project A i sample i Protect LE RSFS
203. essary After conversion the main project file name will be project name mtpj and the subproject file name will be project name mtsp After conversion the main project will be the active project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 43 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When opening from a HEW project file hwp a Select the project for conversion settings When a HEW project file is selected the Project Convert Setting dialog box will open Figure 2 34 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box Toa oan corsar poa prope for da C Seber the preci troy Che belt Viet box sed ches he ets E COn 15 Nod Seber LEa propecte wth Cil bodos pos can cheese bora propecia dong wf coca when pees presa the OK button withte Eangi Bey 260133 the BEA projects ple rvade if the save place se Tes Spree Hea Cm mi El e boda in 219 Aree bode Hasel pee pan a Hab perkant Embrddo ys bee pcg please bet Sede lo bee he dera be mach project The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings b Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 44 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 35 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Project I
204. f project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end brA build mode name Execute a rebuild Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in specified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is per formed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project specified by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 93 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Option bcbA build mode name Description Perform a clean and then execute a build Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in specified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is per formed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project specified by project file name then an error will be dis
205. figuration is saved as the one for the active user Does not open this dialog box automatically at startup Opens this dialog box automatically at startup when Main window appears default R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 255 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Remark This property can also be set from the Option dialog box under the General Startup and Exit cat egory Function buttons Button Function Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 256 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 B GLOSSARY B GLOSSARY This section defines terms used in the CS manual 1 Node This refers to an element representing a branch or leaf on a tree view connected with lines to show a hierarchy in the Project Tree panel and other views Figure B 1 Project Tree Panel E RSFS63NACKFE Microcontroller Ae CC RX Build Tool l RX Simulator Debug Tool cL File S A sub Subproject E RSFS63NACxFB Microcontroller A CC RX Build Tool EN RX Simulator Debug Tool a File 2 List control This displays a widget such as Urizzed in the panel settings areas Click to display a list of available selections 3 Context menu This refers to the menu that appears when you right click in a window over an icon or other object on the screen The menu displays a list of operations currently available for the
206. file How to change Changes not allowed Save with absolute Select whether to save the file location with the absolute path path This property is not displayed if the Property panel being displayed while a depen dency file is selected on the project tree Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Saves the file location with the absolute path No Saves the file location with the relative path Last update The time and date on which this file was changed last is displayed Default File updated time and date How to change Changes not allowed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 159 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Writable Select whether to enable writing to the file This property is not displayed if the Property panel being displayed while a depen dency file is selected on the project tree Default Yes when the file is write enabled No when the file is not write enabled How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Enables the file to write No Does not enable the file to write 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed if the Property panel being displayed while a dependency file is selected on the proj ect tree Memo Add memos to the file Add one item in one line The specified mem
207. files an de dreected peopect folder do sa ree peopel okis After setting each item on the dialog box click the Create button For more on the settings for each item see 2 3 2 Create a new project Remark You can create a subproject with CC RL as the build tool by reusing the file structure of a subproject with CA78K0R as the build tool See CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build Tool Operation for details The project tree after adding the subproject will look like the one below R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 22 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 10 Project Tree Panel After Adding a Subproject A RSFS63NACKFB Microcontroller A CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Del A sub Subproject A RSF563NACKFB Microcontroller e CC RX Build Tool EN RX Simulator Debug Tool a File 2 3 4 Create a project for multi core RH850 A project for multi core consists of a boot loader project and an application project The application project creates pro grams for each CPU core and the boot loader project manages activation of those programs The following shows how to create a project for multi core by specifying the boot loader project and the application proj ect as the main and subprojects respectively On the tool bar click 4 st to open the Start panel R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 23 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 Figure 2
208. folder Remark 2 When the path name is too long to be shown in the text area oO is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over re 3 Top folder of pack target area Specify the top folder of the packing target Enter the absolute path directly or click the Browse button and select the location via the Browse For Folder dialog box a Button Browse Browse For Folder dialog box appears When a folder is selected the path is shown in the text box Remark 1 Up to 247 characters can be entered in Top folder of pack target area When the input violates any restriction the following messages are shown Message Description The folder name including the path is too long The folder name is more than 247 characters Make it within 247 characters The folder name is invalid The following The folder name with the invalid path is desig characters cannot be used lt gt nated The characters lt gt cannot be used for the file name and folder name Specify a folder that contains the project A folder that does not contain the project folder folder is specified Remark 2 When the path name is too long to be shown in the text area oo is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over re Function buttons Button Function OK Closes this dialog box and packs and saves the project and this product to the des
209. folder structure preserved Figure 2 97 Sample of Project Pack Specify top folder Project folder The folder structure of the files under the work folder is preserved in the saved pack Save location oa a work anp Copy_Files Files outside the work folder are saved to the Copy_Files folder Note src The folder that source files are stored inc The folder that is specified as Additional include paths lib The folder that is specified as Additional library paths If you click the OK button the copy process will begin The dialog box below is displayed during the copying process R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 87 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 98 Copying i Packing project The save location folder structure is shown below Figure 2 99 Save Location Folder Structure Save location readme txt The explanation of the structure of the save location errorlog txt A record of the files that failed to copy Top folder name The folder that is specified as the top folder of the packing targetNote 1 Tools Copy_ The folder that this product is installedNote 2 Files The copy location folder for files not placed in the top folder of the packing targetNote 3 copylog txt A record of the copied files 4 2 The storage folder 1 for copied filesNote 4 The storage folder 2 for copied filesNote 4 Note 1 The following files in t
210. following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Batch Build Description of each area 1 Build mode list area This area displays the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project their build modes and their macro definitions a Project This area displays the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and their build modes which you wish to run a build When this dialog box is opened for the first time after the project is created all the check boxes are unchecked From the second time the previous setting is retained b Build mode This area displays the build modes which the main project and subprojects have c Defined macros lt 1 gt When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project For the combination of the main project and subprojects and their build modes the defined macros which have been set in the Compile Options tab and the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel are sepa rated with and displayed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 190 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE The defined macro in the compile option comes before the one in assemble option They are separated with
211. for information about debug ging g Tool The Tool menu displays tool related menu commands Options Opens the Option dialog box Plug in Setting Opens the Plug in Manager dialog box Customize Opens the User Setting dialog box h Window Window menu shows menu items to operate the window R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 108 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Split Splits the active Editor panel horizontally Only the active Editor panel can be split Other panels will not be split A panel can be split a maximum of two times Remove Split Removes the split view of the Editor panel Close All Panels Closes all split panels 1 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 1 tab name of panel 2 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 2 tab name of panel 3 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 3 tab name of panel 4 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 4 tab name of panel 5 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 5 tab name of panel 6 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 6 tab name of panel 7 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 7 tab name of panel 8 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 8 tab name of panel 9 Tab name of panel Moves the focus to 9 tab name of panel Other Windows If 10 or more divide panels are open open the Other Windows dialog box i Help The Help menu displays help related menu comman
212. fy the name of the project and the location to create the project file in Project name and Place If you don t create a folder with the project name under the specified location clear the Make the project folder check box Caution When directly entering the location to create the project file enter it as an absolute path R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 25 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 5 Specify simultaneous creation of the application project When an application project is created at the same time as a subproject for the boot loader project select Create an application project with a boot loader project An image of the dialog box after setting the items is shown below After Setting Items Microcontroller Lhereg microcoritrolber SA serch mecrocortraller o jipe Ey RHESETL Product Mame A 7F 701201 FORO EAS GFP himma ROM aie HE ATRIO EGAREVOFPITROFP IA a Lane E FHISDEIH S intemal RAN 230 Bytea RASOSE be FLO Local AAUP E Tete Local AARC Lee Global RAM 11064B Em son RAM3152 Additional informaban Humber of Cores d Boot Loader for Rubio LE AH sample mul Clee mocococcon Documents a Make tha peeqect falder Wisera ynocnonanood Dee ure tea ample miki sample mali mpi Craal an appicadi n croc wihi a bool loader progi When you click the Create button the project file is created in the location specified in 4 and the structure of
213. g the build tool provided by CS see the 2 8 2 Run a build of all files When running a rebuild of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu Remark When a dependent project is set for the active project a rebuild of the dependent project is also run Figure E 30 Rebuild active project Item SME sub DebugOnly Subpraject AS R7F701010xAFP Micron ie 4 None Build Tool EJ Rebuild sub _DebugGnly RHESO Simulator Debug A Clean sub_DebugOnly m Fil atii Open Folder with Explorer El Windows Explorer Menu Build sub Debu om H A Set sub _DebugOnly as Active Project tl Remove from Project Shift Delete US Paste Ctri y ap Rename F2 A Property E 5 3 Run a clean The command specified with the Commands executed in the project cleaning property in the Build category in the Property panel is executed see 2 Setting the command when running a clean This allows you to delete all the inter mediate files and generated files output by running a build The commands being specified in the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see E 4 3 Set the target project for a build can be executed 1 When running a clean of the entire project The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Select Clean Project from the Build menu R20UT3101E
214. ged Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path or file name including the path Output panel Error List panel This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool debug tool each plug in or the result of the Find In Files with the Find and Replace dialog box This panel is used to list the information of messages output from the build tool error information Memory Mapping Profiler panel This panel is used to display the memory mapping information of load modules collected by the build tool The amount of used memory can be reduced by analyzing the infor mation Column Chooser dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 This dialog box is used to sort show hide the columns displayed on the Memory Mapping Profiler panel If the display in the panel has been customized all of those custom izations can be returned to the default state in this dialog box tENESAS Page 98 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Filter Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the filter conditions when filtering the display of memory mapping information on the Memory Mapping Pro filer
215. harga ova propecia Hna niona When pos presa the JOR bution Abosi chaeging Bey esidrgs the DEN projecto me rada in ihe carve place Je he Select lle pl Era die y don de Hosze poe opina Higi perka Emboddod rolls hop prec please bo dete a Hael tee dera dor meh pod The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings 2 Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 34 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 26 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Project Is Selected RR a ET a one Errai Preci stiren Hra merei Binoni e Pie Pet acd cece o bey Ep E sl Urine J iy FATTI a Product More ASFS111 AAFKE gm rahip POM rial a REFS fa FL el rch FAJA woe Ba Ura Akia errain Pa PL So i E REFS IAAF Edi E MP ASS HALE MP RALA r E RHE Sr E REH AHF A APPL rir ri Hire pratt End ol pt Empty Arke CC AX Fressi perra aa Mid Flsce Ct work EPET Bes e Backup the pead coros bon fhe wher corvarsice After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Remark 1 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion im
216. hat newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 225 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Update category Use this category to configure general setting relating to update Figure A 47 Option Dialog Box General Update Category E y Tanara 3 Startup and Exit 3 Dipla Ciareral Update T o dor dales when pan rl Check al etewal of 3 241 fons gt gt Linda Wans er Gntion ne o_o A Ss Font and Galo al External Tools aS ON 2 Buill 3 D hez 3 Weer Fiare Function buttons E hitializa Al Serinex o DK Cael Apply Heb The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Check for updates when opening project Automatically checks for updates when a project is opened Does not automatically check for updates when a project is opened 2 Check at intervals of Specify the interval at which to check for updates o Either enter a number between 0 and 99 directly via the keyboard or
217. he category name is in editing the characters of the selection are cop ied to the clipboard Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project When the category name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted You can rename the selected Category node Property Displays the selected Category node s property on the Property panel Remark 1 When more than one component are selected the context menu of the last selected component is dis played Remark 2 The context menu of the currently selected component is displayed in the blank area under the project tree R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 140 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Change Microcontroller dialog box This dialog box is used to change the microcontroller to be used in the project Remark See 2 4 12 Change the microcontroller for details about changing the microcontroller Figure A 7 Change Microcontroller aaa Box Changa microcontroller to col Tei reh E rare rile h a FXERN a Pe are ROM ece KBylee 760 A Wt REFEGIMAC lt BO 1 76pin P yes 5 SREP SRM Ae FB dp 3 ie arian saelEytest 14107 I ROP SGSNACS FOU Tipin Information Packege PLOPI HKA A Me RSF SGSNACEF Pi iiipin JE ASFEGNACLO 1 pro J FoF ShSNMAGeLE 14 bam Mi ESFSGIMACL K 10 ain Mi ESFSGIMAC lt LKC gin MN PSFS6
218. he following buttons in this area R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 246 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Add Command Dialog Box for selecting a command to be added above the com mand currently selected in this area In the Add Command Dialog Box all commands that can be added are displayed grouped by their categories First select the category of command in the Categories area then select the command you want to add and press the OK button pressing the Cancel button cancels the addition of the command and closes this dialog box Delete Deletes the command currently selected in this area Move Up Moves the command currently selected in this area up one line Move Down Moves the command currently selected in this area down one line Modify Selec tion Displays the following menu items for editing the arrangement of the menu item or button currently selected in this area Menu Item Description Reset Resets the selected menu item button Delete Deletes the selected menu item button Name Displays the name of the selected menu item button Default Style Checking this menu item returns the display style of the selected menu item button to the default state by default Text Only Always Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item but ton by text only the icon will not be displayed Text Only in M
219. he placeholder c Description This area displays the description of the placeholder Caution This area is displayed only when the caller of this dialog box supports placeholders Remark The placeholders which can be specified differ depending on the area that this dialog box is called from For the specific placeholder see the description of the area that this dialog box is called from Function buttons Button Function OK Reflects the entered path to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered path to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 169 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool debug tool each plug in or the result of the Find In Files with the Find and Replace dialog box Messages are shown individually on the tab categorized by the output tool The All Messages tab consolidates and displays all output messages Remark This panel can be zoomed in and out by in the tool bar or by moving the mouse wheel forward or backward while holding down the Ctrl key Figure A 22 Output Panel BS eee oe ee ee ar all E E E REEL RE lke TE wT T Htr i ae Start build sub DefauliBuild J Def quilt Bui bids IIb Library
220. he project to be created it is automatically diverted except for a debug dedicated project Remark 2 When the build tool for the project to be created does not support a node of the source project the node will be displayed as a normal Category node on the project tree e g Startup node or Down load files node etc 6 Create an application project with a boot loader project When an application project is created at the same time as a subproject for the boot loader project select this check box The check box is selected by default Caution This area is not displayed when this dialog box is opened from the Create New Multi core Project area on the Start panel Function buttons Button Function Create Creates a project according to the designated condition and closes the dialog box When the Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project check box is checked creates a project by diverting the file composition of the project main or subproject designated in Project to be passed Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 121 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Convert Setting dialog box This dialog box includes the settings for conversion from e studio and the old development environment CubeSuite HEW PM project or workspace to a CS project
221. he top folder of the packing target specified in the Pack Settings dialog box are stored All files in the project folder All files in the folders specified in the Additional include paths and Additional library paths properties of the build tool and the C source file or assembler source file that is the build target Files added to the project Note 2 If you save the project only in the Pack Settings dialog box this folder is not created Note 3 Files that are not in the top folder of the packing target are stored in folders for each identical path Note 4 The digits in the folder name are adjusted by the required number of folders For example for 2 digits the name is 01 02 and so on Caution 1 Information on the start menu is not a subject of the save When using the save location tools follow the content of readme txt in the save folder Caution 2 Information on the tool installation is not a subject of the save To uninstall the save location tools delete the entire save folder Caution 3 Custom settings made in the Option dialog box and User Setting dialog box are not saved When you use tools from the saved file the environment will be configured to the default settings Caution 4 Tools in the save folder cannot be updated Caution 5 Files not placed inside the top folder of the packing target that is specified in the Pack Settings dialog box are copied to the Copy_Files folder when saving so when using the
222. help Displays the help with regard to the currently selected error information by selecting Help for Message in the context menu or pressing F1 key while the caret is in the line where the warning message or the error mes sage is displayed c Save of log The contents displayed currently on the panel can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Error List As from File menu and opens the Save As dialog box Toolbar Switches between display and non display of error messages in the Error information list area The number following the icon is the number of error messages Switches between display and non display of warning messages in the Error information list area The number following the icon is the number of warning messages o Messages Switches between display and non display of normal messages in the Error information list area The number following the icon is the number of normal messages Selects the target range of messages to be displayed in the Error information list area Current File File opened with the currently active Editor panel Active Project Files registered in the active project Opened File All files opened with the Editor panel File menu Error List panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for File menu in the Error List panel other items are common to all the panels Save Error List Saves the contents on the panel in the previously saved text file t
223. hitiatss Ali Settings iise bpk Hep The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Information area a User information area This area displays a list of user information The content in the Information field can be edited To edit the information select one of the items from the list click the Edit button and then type the information directly into the text box up to 256 characters b Buttons Edit Edits the content of the selected Information item by typing directly in the text box This button is disabled if nothing is selected in the list 2 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 228 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 229
224. idd Le sample2 j Uses amp Local Disk C ce Local Disk 051 R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 66 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS In the dialog box select the target project file for importing the build options and click the Open button The build options of the selected project file are imported to the current project Remark 1 The conditions of the project that is importable are shown below The build tool is the same The type of the project application library etc is the same The project has been created by CS with the same version Remark 2 The target build options for importing are only the general options set in the properties of the build tool The setting of the standard build options see 2 7 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project and the individual options are not imported Remark 3 All the build modes of the import target are imported However the build modes of the current project other than DefaultBuild are deleted Remark 4 The version of the build tool to be used is imported 2 7 2 Set the link order of files The link order of object module files and library files is decided automatically but you can also set the order The procedures for performing this operation are described below 1 Open the Link Order dialog box On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu The Link
225. ild mode selected in the dialog box Caution For projects that the selected build mode does not exist the build mode is duplicated from Default Build with the selected build mode name and the build mode is changed to the duplicated build mode Remark 1 The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild See 2 7 6 Add a build mode for the method of adding a build mode Remark 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuild R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 73 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Delete a build mode Deleting a build mode is performed with the Build Mode Settings dialog box Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The dialog box will open Figure 2 73 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode Buildiiode 2 Burid mode list etault Build Duplicate Buld Node Duplicate Delete l Rename Gloss Heb Select the build mode to be deleted from Build mode list and click the Delete button The Message dialog box below will open Figure 2 74 Message Dialog Box r Question 00232001 e Delete build roda Buikd Pode 37 ook Cone tee To continue with the operation click the OK button in the dialog box The selected build mode
226. ile a Add an individual files Drag the file from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The file is added below the File node Figure 2 46 Project Tree Panel File Drop Location Project Tree sample Protect PE RSFSG3NACIFB Microcontroller A OC RX Build Tool e RX Simulator Debug Tool SY File Drop the file here R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 56 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 bo Add a folder 2 FUNCTIONS Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The Add Folder and File dialog box will open Remark You can also add multiple folders to the project at the same time by dragging multiple folders at same time and dropping them onto the project tree Caution When the folder with the name that is more than 200 characters is dropped the folder is added to the project tree as a category with the name that 201st character and after are deleted Figure 2 47 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Teo or more selections G gurea file Ec C source Tile cpp E cp Fco Header file bx hpp inc Assembler source tile OF sre s Jump table filet jmp Symbol address filets fey Library tielt Jib Object module filet obj Ralicatable file Pegal Text file ec Subtolder level to search eee LOK Cancel In the dialog box select the types of the files to
227. information display change area Expands the entire currently displayed detailed information display change area 2 Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the node that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed categorized in the list Also you can directly change the settings of the selected node The node includes Project node Sub project node Microcontroller node Design Tool node Build Tool node Debug Tool node Analyze Tool node file and Category node The 2 mark indicates all the items in the category are expanded The mark indicates all the items are shrunk You can expand shrink the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name If the mark is displayed only the hex number is allowed in the text box Please see the information on each tab for the details of the display setting in the category and its contents 3 Property description area In this area brief description of the categories and their contents selected in the Detailed information display change area is shown 4 Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed when a tab is selected In this panel the following tabs are contained see the section explaining each tab for the details on the contents of the display or the method of the setting on the tab a When the following nodes are selected in the Project Tree panel Project node P
228. ings information 2 9 1 Save the project file with a different name You can save the project file with a different name From the File or Project menu select Save Project As the Save Project As dialog box will open Figure 2 91 Save Project As Dialog Box E Save Project As E ee J work sample TE pl Orgarize New Folder ii g Y Favorites DefaultBuild de Downloads b nh ME Desktop o zarmple rmip Recent Places a Libraries Sa Documents ie Pictures F Fila name Save as yoe Project File mbpj a Hide Folders Syve Cancel Specify the save folder and separate project filename mtpj on the dialog box The project file is saved in the specified folder with the filename Caution 1 The files registered to the project are the same as those in the original project the files registered to the project are not copied Caution 2 _ If there is already a subproject file in the same folder and with the same file name excluding the file extension as the project file then the project file will not be saved correctly Change the name of the main project or the subproject R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 84 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Remark 1 If you save the project file with a different name from the original project file and then modify one or both of them then the project files will have different contents Remark 2 To save the subproject files
229. ink order specification file Click the Export button in the Link Order dialog box to open the Select Export File dialog box Figure 2 62 Select Export File Dialog Box ee J work samole e 47 Search samy p Granze New Folder ir g de Windows DefaultBuild de work ds sub sample di DefaultBuild E sub i sample Users Bu Local Disk C2 Ale name SE as type Link order specification fle rita Hide Folders YVE Cancel In the dialog box specify the file link order specification file that is output the list of the file names displayed in File in the Link Order dialog box Click the Save button to generate the link order specification file Caution Only the file names are output to the link order specification file If a file with the same name exists check the location of the file in the popup display after install ing the link order specification file b Edit the link order specification file Open the link order specification file with an editor and then change the description order of the file names The code example of the link order specification file is shown below CS Vx xx xx Link order specification file SampleProject XxXXXXX XX XXXX fileOl obj file03 0b3 librar yUZs lis file02 0b3 libraryOl lib libraryO3 lib The following points should be noted when describing the link order specification file R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 68 of 283 A
230. ins folder of this product Caution The plug ins except for the Editor panel are disabled on this tab after default installation To use each plug in enable it on this tab and then restart CS Figure A 51 Plug in Manager Dialog Box Additional Function Tab Plug in Manager Checked plugsing are losded st the 54 sdart up These sobras are enabled of the next start up t You can never uncheck a check boo of iha ars phan that is required by the Cor Also on the Basic Funcbon tab it is recommended that the chackbowes of the plue n dor de isopet mecrocontaller of e develepenrant an mat cleaned Basic Fusjon Hi ee bar Plica bs Here Desorption ode Generator PinView Plug in Plug in to generate the device driver automatically and to view be Ey Debug Console Plug in Gebuglornole plug in 10 support veng alandard LO 2 9 Editor phag in DLI sEdtor DI 1 Gel rorPrthon Gonzales Phr in it is a console where the FonPethon commands and the Gubeduitet E Pin Gonfipurstor Plup in Plein to deine the device pin confisurstion Prorom Analyzer Plug in Plug in ta analyze program Stack Laage Traces Utdbi to dsple and aipat slack usage Of pach lectora ey ledais Manager Plg ri Phi lo c mica wilh Cat Mlale Mansger Function buttons ok Cancel Hedo The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Plug in Se
231. installed and started for the first time select Windows Start menu gt gt Programs gt gt Renesas Electronics CS gt gt CS for CC RX RH850 Remark In Windows 8 or Windows 8 1 double click on CS for CC RX RH850 on the start screen The following Main window will be opened E JHA Kand t ALA EFFET OK E 00m Logi fil Lot e cl eee e iri de re ed ted ce Bee dep AT lr al rra Ae edo mn de e ede ae fe Cuna Has Profes A bs fp las Eek dl Ga AE AAA PTS Lira Ha Pill a iin jet Opa Esli Pro jiri Lakk epa e a iia de id der e E dr id Chores Exbilira af wide iaa oe Egh lorenee eriet Fire hu PAA Pr ad Mes poo e RO E a ADA ai ba ri do da A prec Sagara rai n i e mG EM Tara Ve quizas be e aio ogee bo rod E rus ka cn le eee ler De pro rn e ar ide ie A aa tel a Be re rl E aii a l rs aer Pe E AT A Dh ba rd b a D ITA A ha E EA Mar arca paco al cor a p nad rr An mcr e de raed poi di A dai a ba pee Ea EES bu ral pro he hey et er bebe be pr 2 ee do pedo pr pr Hote E mist ara a i ea Ad PH is al Er rt apera ke Fle i al vam On the second and subsequent occasions you can startup CS from the icon in the task tray when the rapid start see 2 11 1 Use rapid start is enabled More than one CS for CC can be started simultaneously However since the setting information customization of panel layout or menus is common the setting information of the CS for CC th
232. ion Information requiring particular attention Remarks Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OXXXXX All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 GENERAL 272502 dae eb ad daca eh Sean et ee oe oe nce eee hee eed ook a 1 1 1 MEOE A IN AN 7 1 2 gcc ct ee a RAI AS NA ee ee RNA 7 1 3 System Conigu atos annaa a ete eee a ae ee a a eg aro a ttn ao a 8 1 4 Operating ENVFrOnMEN i212 y nas A A E AN PAE OS OU AE A T E 9 2 FUNCTIONS 46226 sogas rre ica AS 10 2 1 A ete Bae eh ese dhs ohads chee eee aes mae r AS ok Se ee ane een 10 2 2 SCO eas ea A A fateh oats aia en OI a hak nA 11 2 3 Creale a PrOleCl 34 2t05t2xe5 cdma deatend bates Sous eret de pda a tote won Cagle ta eaten 13 2 3 1 SER O ante NO 16 2 3 2 Create a Mewpro Ecler eran Gg en Sie ee ee en ec cy a E 17 2 3 3 ACA a NEW SUDDIO EC h sipaan alaiean Bo eee ee We hee PA idad 22 2 3 4 Create a project for multi core RH850 0 0 0 eee ee eens 23 2 4 Menipulale a Projects estaras Swale Gein ele te eee OM aoe As 28 2 4 1 BUT 2 as dae cerety Gah hd oh tree A Se re ee Ee 28 2 4 2 Add an existing SUDO eclesial eat ie ee ene ne eee in 29 2 4 3 Project is added to the favorites Melia scr 2 4 s ucn te a 4 are poe he Gee weeded eee aucee ee bao aee 29 2 4 4 Remove a subproject from the project 0 0c eee eee eens 30 2 4 5 Ghange the project Name 4 cts dd A
233. iption The file name including the path is too long The file name with the path is more than 259 charac Make it within 259 characters ters The specified path contains a folder that does The path contains a folder that does not exist not exist The file name or path name is invalid The fol The file name with the invalid path is designated lowing characters cannot be used The following characters cannot be used for the file lt gt name and folder name lt gt Function buttons Function OK Creates the file with the entered file name adds it to the project and opens with the Editor panel And then closes this dialog box Cancel Does not create a file and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 144 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Folder and File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project The folder is added as a category Figure A 9 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more seleciona G coros file Ec C source Tile E cop Ton Fco Header file th okhpo inc Assembler source file OF sre 2 Jump table filet jmp Symbol address filet fey Library fielt Jib 1 Object module filet obj Ralacatable file re l Text file ec 2 Functio
234. is deleted from the project Caution 1 You cannot delete DefaultBuild Caution 2 If the currently set build mode is deleted DefaultBuild is set 2 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project On the build tool s Property panel if you add a change to the settings for the standard build options the value of the property will be displayed in boldface Figure 2 75 Property Panel After Changing Standard Build Option 4 Output File Type and Path Chubput file typ Intermediate file output folder z Execute Module Hex File a E i To make the build options for the currently selected project main project or subproject the standard build options remove the boldface select the Build tool node on the project tree and select Set to Default Build Option for Project from the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 74 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 76 Set to Default Build Option for Project Item SEN CC RX Build 2 RX Simulator Del at Bulld Project F7 H file gy Rebuild Project Shift F7 aa Clean Project EN Set to Default Build Option for Project l Import Build Options i Set Link Order Ef Property The values of the properties after setting them as the standard build option are as shown below Figure 2 77 Property Panel After Setting Standard Build Option 4 Qulput File Typeand Path ita
235. is dialog box Note that if the process termination is impossible this button is disabled R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 192 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Message dialog box This dialog box is used to display messages output by the various tools Figure A 32 Message Dialog Box y Launching debugger failed Direct Error Gausa The value of ihe main clock frequency i incorrect 1891713 y Launching debugger failed EH L Error Process cee The value of lhe main clock frequency i mconrect E1891719 ED OS Technical Information Expand Aul Detail Version Indore matice The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu Message dialog box dedicated items Context menu Edit menu Message dialog box dedicated items How to open The dialog box appears automatically when a message is output Description of each area 1 Message area Shows messages to inform in icons and message information edit not allowed Note that the message is categorized by the following message types and an alphabet to indicate the message type is added to the head of the ID number R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 193 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Type Description x C Internal error Processing terminated Suspended due to internal error E
236. is selected in the Categories area the name of all commands that CS provides are dis played together with their icons if exist To add a command on a toolbar menu drag and drop the command name in this area onto the toolbar menu dis played in the actual Main window R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 239 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Buttons Modify Selection In order that the menu item or the button on a toolbar currently selected in the Main window displays the following menu items beneath this button Menu Item Description Reset Resets the selected menu item button Delete Deletes the selected menu item button Name Displays the name of the selected menu item button Default Style Checking this menu item returns the display style of the selected menu item button to the default state by default Text Only Always Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item but ton by text only the icon will not be displayed Text Only in Menu This is enabled only when a menu item is selected Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item button by text only the icon will not be displayed Image and Text Checking this menu item displays the selected menu item but ton by both text and icon Begin a Group Recently Used Inserts separator just before the selected menu item button This item is not supp
237. isters For defining low level I O functions source file for assembler For defining low level I O functions lowsrc h resetprg c sbrk c sbrk h Prototypes for low level I O functions For defining initialization for C language For defining the function for allocating the heap memory For defining the heap size stacksct h For defining pragma for the stack typedefine h For defining typedefine for the types used in sbrk c etc vect h Prototypes for interrupt vector functions vecttbl c For defining the interrupt vector table If the build tool is CC RL the following start up source files are generated in the project folder These files are also registered in the project tree File Name cstart asm R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 branch to the main function ENESAS Description For defining the start up routine from the occurrence of a reset to a The memory address and stack area need to be modified to match the microcontroller used Page 18 of 283 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS File Name Description iodefine h For defining I O registers main c For defining the empty main function C Application CC RX Select this to generate the load module file and hex file from a C source file only a file that has a main func tion and C source files by using build tool CC RX provided by CS The generated file will be the debug target Remar
238. items are all invalid Button Pur Function Display hide the detailed display area Note that this button is available only when there is detailed information Record Screen Saves a snapshot of the window and error information on the desktop These files would help us to reply more quickly and efficiently when you contact us OK Closes this dialog box Displays the help with regard to the displayed message R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 195 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Pack Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to pack and save the project and this product Figure A 33 Pack Settings Dialog Box do Pack projeci ar donde Pack protei pri Sites he product sel and Wee projet sel peter rl ikier Paine moy baka s der mies fo a der dre mantar 2 Place G Yarnton Documenta 3 Top folder of pack target Keer k sample Function buttons a aa a The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Project node and then select Save Project and Development Tools as Pack age from the context menu Description of each area 1 Pack type selection area Select the pack type Pack project and tools Packs the project and this product default Pack project only Packs the project only 2 Place
239. itle in the active tab Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 203 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General External Text Editor category Use this category to configure general settings relating to the external text editor Figure A 37 Option Dialog Box General External Text Editor Category y Carral 1 Cu Ea Eo Line external 3t or tg A 3 User Piara gi Pathe Eik Path 6 ratifica Settings Function buttons E hitialse Al Setingt o K Gael dopke He The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Use external text editor Uses an external text editor as the text editor Uses the Editor panel as the text editor default 2 External text editor path Either typ
240. ject are packed up and saved Remark 3 See Project Convert Seiting dialog box for details about each setting item 4 Convert the CS project The CubeSuite project is converted to the CS project A CubeSuite project is converted to a CS project according to the rule below A CubeSuite project is converted to a project with the same name as the original project After conversion the project file name will be project name mtp Remark 1 The project file after conversion is created in the folder the CubeSuite project file was placed in If there is already a project file with the same name _number_ number 1 2 will be added to the file name Remark 2 The build mode and build options information is not the target for conversion if the build tool is different from the CubeSuite project file R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 40 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 10 Convert a HEW project into a CS project You can convert a High performance Embedded Workshop hereafter abbreviated HEW project into a CS project Select Open Project from the Project menu with CS and then select a workspace file hws or project file hwp When opening from a HEW workspace file hws When opening from a HEW project file hwp 1 When opening from a HEW workspace file hws a Select the project for conversion settings When a HEW workspace file is selected the Project Convert Setting
241. ject is selected in Project Remark 2 A cyclic reference project is displayed in gray in Dependent projects Example 1 Builds are run in the following order when no dependent project is set SubProject1 gt SubProject2 gt SubProject3 gt SubProject4 gt MainProject MainProject SubProjectt SubProject2 SubProject3 SubProject4 Example 2 Builds are run in the following order when MainProject and SubProject2 are set as dependent projects for SubProject1 and SubProject4 is set as the dependent project for SubProject2 SubProject4 gt SubProject2 gt MainProject gt SubProject1 gt SubProject3 R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 32 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Reference Reference R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 33 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 8 Convert an e studio project into a CS project RX You can convert an e studio project for RX into a CS project Select Open Project from the Project menu with CS and then select a project file rcpc Remark The project file rcpc for e studio is output by using the export function of e studio 1 Select the project for conversion settings The Project Convert Setting dialog box will open ume 2 25 AB Convert ball male Box Toa can corean poer prai for da G Seki the proyect Forn be bet let boo 20d chars de Se el 44 Pee Salen arar proyect wth Cil becs pos can c
242. ject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the File menu The Add File dialog box will open Designate the file to be created Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open Designate the file to be created Remark A blank file is created at the location designated in the Add File dialog box h Removing a file from the project You can remove a file from the project by one of the following procedures The file itself is not deleted from the file system Select the file you want to remove from the project and then select Remove from Project from the Project menu Select the file you want to remove from the project and then select Remove from Project from the context menu i Moving a file You can move a file by the following procedure The file is moved below the File node Drag the file you want to move and then drop it onto the destination Remark 1 If you drop the file in the main project or subproject the individual options set in the file are retained Remark 2 If you drop the file between the different projects or onto the main project or subproject in same project the file is copied not moved Note that the individual option set in the file is not retained j Adding a category You can add a category node by one of the following procedures The
243. k The following start up source files are generated in the project folder The files marked with OK in the Registration in Project Tree column are also registered in the project tree When necessary also register the files marked with in the project tree File Name Description Registration in Project Tree ProjeciName c For defining the main function dbsct c For setting up standard sections hwsetup c For initializing hardware intprg c For defining interrupt functions iodefine h For defining I O registers lowlvl src For defining low level I O functions source file for assembler lowsrc c For defining low level I O functions lowsrc h Prototypes for low level I O functions resetprg c For defining initialization for C language sbrk c For defining the function for allocating the heap memory sbrk h For defining the heap size stacksct h For defining pragma for the stack typedefine h For defining typedefine for the types used in sbrk c etc vect h Prototypes for interrupt vector functions vecttbl c For defining the interrupt vector table Empty Application CC RH CC RX Select this to generate the load module file by using build tool CC RH CC RX provided by CS The generated file will be the debug target Sample startup programs are not generated when the project is created Boot Loader for Multi core CC RH Select this to create a boot loader project for multi c
244. l 5 i maiin Timing oi pdala depres Ad the fared Gard i E 6 Enscis pasaba puid amore projects 7 britain Salina i Function buttons E hitialse Al Setingt OR ftanos opyo Hep The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Options Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enables the rapid build Nte feature default Does not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling this feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after editing source files For details on the rapid build feature see the following When the target project type is other than a debug dedicated project 2 8 3 Run a build in paral lel with other operations When the target project type is a debug dedicated project E 5 4 Run a rapid build a Observe registered files changing Start s a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like Does not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like default R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 216 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V
245. l 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 http www renesas com O 2014 Renesas Electronics Corporation and Renesas Solutions Corp All rights reserved Colophon 3 0 CS V3 00 00 ENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT3101EJO100
246. l None Build Tool E y File pal Download files R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 261 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 3 Add a File to a Project Add a download file to debug to the created debug dedicated project Furthermore to perform source level debugging add C source files to be used for creation of the download file to the project This section describes how to add these files to the debug dedicated project E 3 1 Add a download file Add a load module file to the debug dedicated project as the download file to debug Caution To perform source level debugging step execution in source level units etc a load module file with the symbol information must be added to the debug dedicated project Remark 1 The specified load module file is reflected automatically on the Download File Settings tab in the Prop erty panel of the debugging tool Also use this Download File Settings tab to configure the load module file type and download options add a hex file or binary file to download additionally as well as the load module file added by this method below See the CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug Tool for details on the down loading A load module file can be added by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing file Drag a load module file from Explorer or th
247. l be displayed in Selected build mode Click the Apply to All button The build mode for the main project and all the subprojects including projects other than a debug dedicated project which belong to the project will be changed to the build mode selected in the dialog box Caution For subprojects that the selected build mode does not exist the build mode of the subproject is duplicated from the contents of its DefaultBuild and then the selected build mode is created newly to the subproject i e the selected build mode with the contents of the subproject is added E 4 3 Set the target project for a build When running a build that targets a specific debug dedicated project main project or subproject you must set that proj ect as the active project Caution The active project is the project subjected to debugging It is not possible to set the active project while connected to the debug tool and therefore you must dis connect the debug tool for active project setting To set the active project select the Project node to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected subproject as Active Project from the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 271 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 25 Set selected project as Active Project Item sub Debugonly Subproject o E R7F701010xAFP Microcont a aL An None Build Tool Rebuild Deb
248. l be invalid Remark 3 See Project Convert Setting dialog box for details about each setting item c Convert the CS project The PM project is converted to the CS project PM projects are converted to CS projects according to the rules below The PM workspace is not converted PM project groups are divided into projects with the same name as the project group After conversion the project file name will be project group name mtpj PM projects are converted to subprojects with the same name as the original project After conversion the subproject file name will be project name cssp After conversion the first subproject shown in the Project Tree will be the active project After conversion the link order in PM is not held Figure 2 39 PM Project Conversion Image PM workspace before conversion CS project after conversion Workspace WS Project PG1 Open this project Project group PG1 Project group PG2 Remark 1 Remark 2 Remark 3 Remark 4 Caution 1 Caution 2 Caution 3 Project P21 Active project Subproject P11 Project P11 Subproject P12 Project P12 gt This project is Project PG2 registered in recently used Subproject P21 projects After conversion CS opens the project that was converted from the PM project group that includes the active project Projects other than this project are registered in recently used projects However the number of projects
249. lbar Project Tree Panel ASFSS3NACxEB Microcontroller A CC RX Build Tool RX Simulator Debug Tool SO File 3 E Build tool generated files ao sample abs not sample meat ree sample map main c Select any of the buttons below on the toolbar of the Project Tree panel Button Description Sorts category nodes and files in order of their names Ascending order Descending order Fal Ascending order Sorts category nodes and files in order of their timestamp 1 Descending order Ascending order E Descending order Displays category nodes and files in order of the user definition default You can change the display order of category nodes and files arbitrarily by dragging and drop ping them 2 6 6 Update file dependencies When you perform a change changing include file paths adding the include statement of the header file to the source file etc that effects the file dependencies in the compile option settings or assemble option settings you must update the dependencies of the relevant files Updating file dependencies is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project 1 For the entire project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 63 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Remark Dependency files include files can be displayed under the source file on the pr
250. le name will be project name mtpj Remark 1 When conversion is performed from the HEW project for RX into the CS project for RX and from the HEW project for SuperH into the CS project for RH850 the target for conversion is the file structure information of the HEW project file configurations build options only a part of options if the HEW project for SuperH is converted into the CS project for RH850 file exclusion and link order information When build options have been added from the version of the target build tools in the HEW project to the version of the build tools after conversion the added options are set to the build tools default val ues after conversion Configurations of the HEW project are replaced with build modes of CS after conversion Any char acters that are not allowed in a CS folder name however lt gt will be replaced by underscores _ The build mode selected by default is determined by the project temporary file project name tps corresponding to the project However if there is no project temporary file the build mode will be DefaultBuild If the build target file changed by Configurations etc in the HEW project files these projects cannot be converted When the link order has been specified in the HEW project that setting is maintained RX Since the available settings for the link order differ with the build mode the order is converted accord R20UT3
251. le name with the invalid path is designated characters that can be used as a file The characters 1 lt gt cannot be name used for the folder name The project which is being used can tbe The currently open project main project or sub diverted project has been specified as the source project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 120 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Description The specified file is invalid Enter a divert An existing file that is not a project file or subproj project file ect file has been specified Remark 3 When the path name is too long to be shown in the text area is displayed The absolute path pops up when the mouse cursor is hovered over rr c Button Browse Open Project dialog box appears When a project file is selected an absolute path of the project file is shown in Project to be passed d Copy composition files in the diverted project folder to a new project folder Select this check box when copying composition files in the project folder of the project specified in Project to be passed to a new project folder The check box is unchecked by default This field is enabled only when the Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project check box is checked Remark 1 When the version of the build tool used in the source project is different from the version of the build tool in t
252. lick on the icon to select the string that is to be used as a filter from the list box The strings that can be selected from the list box and the resulting operation when each is selected are shown below Selectable String Operation When Selected All Displays all display contents Custom Opens the Filter Settings dialog box in which the filter conditions can be set Blanks Displays blank lines NonBlanks Displays lines which are not blank List of all display contents Displays lines which match the selected string Remark When a filter is set the icon changes to i Fix the display of columns or cancel fixed display Fixed display to be displayed always of a column regardless of this area being horizontally scrolled can be set with either of the following methods Click the icon Drag the header of a column for which fixed display is not set and drop it between columns for which fixed display is set or after the last line for which fixed display is set Fixed display of a column can be canceled with either of the following methods Click the 4 icon Drag the header of a column for which fixed display is set and drop it between columns for which fixed dis play is not set R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 178 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE j Save the display contents The contents displayed in this area can be saved as a text file txt CSV
253. mcrosriral lar Up J Wis Fz Product Meme ASF SZ 100 Ea FF oar es aden Crechip FIOM dreih EA see FL E ASF FA Elgar ERES A REPS EFF Elan EREITEA REPS ES p ey Aeris Lr Empty App crbce LEA Frnt Corks erp iP rsaet B Bachup the prd correos ison Glen ae goemai After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Caution 1 Confirm that the microcontroller of each project is selected before clicking the OK button Caution 2 The CPU option and section start option are not changed in accordance with the selected device If the device that differs from the HEW project is selected confirm change the CPU option and section start option after conversion R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 42 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Remark 1 When only one project exists in a HEW project a subproject is not displayed Remark 2 Select session is displayed only when multiple sessions exist in a project Remark 3 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the conver sion the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved Remark 4 See Project Convert Setting dialog box for details about each setting item c Convert the CS project The HEW project is converted to the CS project When opening from a HEW workspac
254. mediately after the conver sion the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved Remark 2 See Project Convert Seiting dialog box for details about each setting item 3 Convert the CS project The e studio project is converted to the CS project An e studio project is converted to a CS project according to the rule below An e studio project is converted to a project with the same name as the original project After conversion the project file name will be project name mtp Remark 1 The target for conversion is the file structure information of the e studio project file configurations build options file exclusion and link order information However if a different build tool is used build options other than include paths and defined macros are not converted In addition if extensions of object files are different the link order is not converted Remark 2 When build options have been added from the version of the target build tools in the e studio project to the version of the build tools after conversion the added options are set to the build tools default values after conversion Remark 3 The project files after conversion are created in the folder specified in the Project Convert Setting dialog box Remark 4 Configurations of the e studio project are replaced with build modes of CS after conversion Any char acters that are not allowed in a CS folder name however
255. mized icon and its panel name appear on the edge of the frame as a tab To display the auto hidden panel move the mouse cursor over the tab The panel opens from the tab and becomes available When the panel loses the focus again the panel will be minimized as the tab 2 Disabling the auto hide feature To disable the auto hide feature click on the panel to hide to select it Right click on the panel s title bar and select Auto hide or click on the panel s title bar E 2 10 2 Float a window To float a window click on its title bar and move it You can also double click the title bar of the window you wish to float or right click and select Floating Figure 2 102 Context Menu Dockable Hide Panel Auto Hide 2 10 3 Dock windows You can dock a floating window to the main window Click and drag the title bar of the window you wish to dock Docking indicators appears automatically in the center top bottom left and right of the main window When the mouse pointer moves over one of the docking indicators part of the window background becomes blue If you release the mouse pointer at this point the window will be docked in the blue area Selecting the indicators allows the window to be placed freely as shown below x Places in the upper part of CS i Places in the left part of CS Places in the right part of CS Places in the lower part of CS Above Places in the upper part of the target panel
256. mode with the same name after conversion then the _n_ n 1 2 will be appended to the build mode name Remark 5 Only the file structure is converted Build options are not converted Remark 6 The conversion result is output to a file as project convert information The project convert information file name is ProjectConvertInformation_projectname txt The project convert information file is output for each converted project Subproject The project convert information file is output to the project folder of the project Subproject The project convert information file is displayed the File node of the project Subproject on the Project Tree panel The output format of the project convert information file is shown below 1 Time and date on which a project was converted 2 lt IDE version gt CS IDE Version Date 3 lt Compiler package version gt Compiler package used in PM project Version gt Compiler package used in CS project Version 4 lt Options not to use Build mode gt Tool name of PM Tab name of build tool property in CS Option 5 lt Options to change Build mode gt Tool name of PM Tab name of build tool property in CS Option of PMP project gt Option of CS project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 52 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Description Time and date on which a project was converted The time and date on which a PM project was c
257. mple map Remark Files displayed under the Build tool generated files node are as follows For other than the library project Load module file abs Intel Hex file hex Motorola S record file mot Binary file bin Link map file map Library file lib Library list file Ibp Error message file err For the library project Library file lib Error message file err Caution The Build tool generated files node is created during build This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building 2 8 1 Run a build of updated files Out of build target files a build of only updated files is run hereafter referred to as build Running a build is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 7 5 Change the build target project 1 When running a build of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a build of the active project Select the project and then select Build active project from the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 77 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 81 Build active project Item E U le Project e Y RSFS6INAS Ee bite L A CC RX Build 4 Rebuild sample n RX Simulator 3 Clean sample 6 13 File gt rara E Windows Explorer Menu Add fi Set sample as Active Project Save Project and Development Tools as Package EY Paste Cti a Ren
258. n a project is loaded and a debug tool is being connected d Project Project menu shows menu items to operate the project Create New Project Closes the current project and opens the Create Project dialog box to cre ate a new project Changes the current project or file to the new one If they have not saved confirm the user whether to save them Open Project Closes the current project and opens the Open Project dialog box to open the existing project Changes the current project or file If they are not saved confirm the user whether to save them R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 106 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Favorite Projects Shows the cascading menu to open and add to your favorite project 1 path Opens the project added by 1 Register to Favorite Project in Favorite Projects If no project is added 1 Favorite Project is shown 2 path Opens the project added by 2 Register to Favorite Project in Favorite Projects If no project is added 2 Favorite Project is shown 3 path Opens the project added by 3 Register to Favorite Project in Favorite Projects If no project is added 3 Favorite Project is shown 4 path Opens the project added by 4 Register to Favorite Project in Favorite Projects If no project is added 4 Favorite Project is shown 1 Register to Favorite Proj The current project path is added to 1
259. n be copied to the clipboard with the following method Select Copy in Edit menu Remark The copied contents can be pasted to a text editor etc but cannot be pasted to this panel e Rearrange the columns The columns displayed in this area can be rearranged with either of the following methods Drag the header of a column and drop it at its destination Drag a column displayed in the Column Chooser dialog box and drop it at the header of this area f Specify display or non display for columns The columns to be displayed in this area can be set with either of the following methods Select the check box of a column displayed in the Column Chooser dialog box Drag a column displayed in the Column Chooser dialog box and drop it in this area The columns not to be displayed in this area can be set with either of the following methods Cancel the selection of the check box of a column displayed in the Column Chooser dialog box Drag the header of a column and drop it outside of this area g Sort the display contents The display contents can be sorted in the ascending order or descending order with the following method Click on the header of a column Multiple columns can be sorted with the following method Click on the header of a column while pressing the Shift key h Filter settings for the display contents A filter for the display contents can be set for each column with the following method C
260. n be executed Remark 1 When running a build of the entire project If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build then all these files are saved The commands being specified in all the debug dedicated projects that belong to the project are executed Click the button on the toolbar Remark 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they are displayed on the project tree You can change the display order of the subprojects by dragging the subproject to be moved and dropping it on the desired location Remark 2 If a project other than a debug dedicated project is included in your projects then builds will be run for that project using the build tool provided by CS see the 2 8 1 Run a build of updated files 2 When running a build of the active project Select the debug dedicated project and then select Build active project from the context menu Remark When a dependent project is set for the active project a build of the dependent project is also run Figure E 29 Build active project Item SEE sub DebugOnly Subprofect L RIFFOLOLOXAFP Micros El Bulld sub_Debugonly H None Build Tool Rebuild sub_DebugOniy oe RH850 Simulator Debud l Clean sub_DebugOnly 3 18 Fil EP File E Open Folder with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Add Set sub_DebugOnly as Active Project Shift Delete Ctrl w F2 R20UT
261. n buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be added to the project You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected 2 Subfolder level to search area Directly enter the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the project 1 is displayed by default Remark Up to 10 decimal number can be specified When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Message Description Fewer than 0 or more than 10 values cannot be More than 10 subfolder levels have been specified specified R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 145 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Description Specify in decimal A number in other than decimal or a string Function buttons Button OK has been specified Function Adds the folder that was dragged and dropped and the files in that folder to the proj ect And then closes this dialog box Cancel Does not add the folder and files and then closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box
262. n the project tree the folder is the category Remark When the category node created by the user exists you can add a file below the node by dropping the file onto the node see 2 6 4 Classify a file into a category for a category node 2 Creating and adding an empty file On the project tree select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open Figure 2 48 Add File Dialog Box Add File File typa G source file Ec C source file cop cp oc Header file h hpp m0 Ascemmbler source file tare Ez Tact file txt Empty source file File pame mario File location CAworkEsample In the dialog box specify the file to be created and then click the OK button The file types to be displayed are as follows Project for the CC RH compiler C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Text file txt R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 58 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Project for the CC RX compiler C source file c C source file cpp cp cc Header file h hpp inc Assembler source file src s Text file txt Project for the CC RL compiler C source file c Header file h inc Assembly source file asm s fsy Text file txt Debug de
263. n with Internal Editor from the context menu Remark 2 When the environment is set to use an external text editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external text editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS 2 6 2 Remove a file from a project To remove the file added to a project select the file to be removed from the project on the project tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 60 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 51 Remove from Project Item 5 File HB Build tool generated files S A main c Compile Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Remove from Project Shitt Belete Rename ae Change Extension Fy Property 2 6 3 Remove a file from the build target You can remove the specific file from the build target out of all the files added to the project Select the file to be removed from the build target on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select No on the Set as build target property in the Build category Figure 2 52 Set as build target Property L SOLE Remark The files that this function can be applied to are C source files assembly source files object files and library files 2 6 4 Classify a file into
264. ncies immediately before executing the build R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 217 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Enable parallel build among projects Enables a parallel build among projects default Builds projects without any dependency in parallel and in a random order and reduces the total build time C Does not perform a parallel build among projects Caution When projects should not be built in a random order the dependency between projects needs to be set See 2 4 7 Set the build order of projects for the setting of the dependency between projects 7 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 218 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to debugging Figure A 44 Option Dialog Box General Debug Category LE Tanaja p TS
265. ng Path Path One path per one line LE Brower Permit non existent path Placeholder Placeholder Wale Descr ption 2 Active Project Die CWsorkisampe Absolute path of the active project folder GcireProjecthane sample Acthe project mane Build Mode Marma Detault Burd Build mode mame MlainfrokctDir Clworkisample Absolute path of the main project folder T R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 167 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select the property corresponding with this dialog box on the Property panel and then click the button Description of each area 1 a Path edit area Edit or add the path or file name including the path Path One path per one line Edit or add the path or file name including the path by directly entering it The path or file name including the path can be designated in multiple lines Designate the path or file name including the path at a line By default the current contents of the text box that opened this dialog box are reflected in this area The path can be added by one of the following methods Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer The file names including the path can be added by one of
266. nged to the different one from the normal icon The file with project general options The file with the individual build options p Highlighting the file with the read only attribute The read only file added to the project is displayed in italic The file without the read only attribute The file with the read only attribute R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 131 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE q Highlighting the file that does not exist The file that is added to the project but does not exist is grayed out and its icon is dimmed The file that exists c_ main c The file that does not exist S maine r Highlighting the build target file lt 1 gt The file which an error occurred during building rapid building rebuilding compiling or assembling is high lighted as the example below The file without errors or warnings The file with an error The file with a warning Remark 1 The file with both an error and a warning is highlighted in red Remark 2 The highlight is canceled when the build option general option or individual option or the build mode is changed lt 2 gt The names of the following files are displayed in boldface The source file that has not been compiled after editing The source file after a clean has been executed The source file after the build tool option has been changed The source file after the build mode has b
267. ngle click Figure A 2 Start Panel We rociar rencia de bbi by brad cat ad a de dor in DSt 1 Go Tha tulad condeno fhe memen onbera Lo eect ue CE Create Now Project ram pearl canbe carad 2 E A nea projeol can Eg bs regad by Mainin the e gonia egislened lo on aing proi Create Mew Multi oore Project 3 EN Ansa bal eer paani lor abies a ver podran Ge fol iis oan be rete Tha boat hiris poe perder ral onde a rg radar bor rab propa abet boo baba ard a on bul abro a rear cr de radar la han Open Existing Projeat Los he pages dl Ch Lon Sl be op hry in de olor rd 4 Ascer Propecia Fave Propecia co Ree Whe zh Open Extsting e sdudio GubeSuteAgh er ornanos Embedded Workshop PMt Project Tha preqectd casad mth a ds mti fhe old DE can ba corta be a CS pepa Tupi ve DOT aida 5 ao Thee bogey es Ceca Gee a pci fr Le y Cf Budd codon aro can ba carrera baba thee peda mih the saree copla ny OLE a appie in tha rol Open Sample Project Haro margi pa ha con ba bull reedita aa praded Aa mbci fhe dared peget beri Hha inl suai preso te 50 bedi rd qeda e eatin doler lo ce de ceed cares proni E ax AMES AWE 6 EOS E E a Bess opein RASID FIESTA RAEI Tiiri Eo Cicer The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open On the toolbar click the a tat button From the menu bar select Window gt gt Start
268. nited States locale it will be Western European Windows Unicode UTF 8 R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 224 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE All other encodings supported by the OS in alphabetical order 3 Debugging Use this area to configure general settings relating to debugging in the text editor a Enable line highlight for PC Shows the current PC as a full line highlight in the text editor default Does not show the current PC as a full line highlight in the text editor b Enable tool tip watch Shows the value of variables in a tool tip when hovering the mouse over the variable in the text editor default Does not show the value of variables in a tool tip c Enable line highlight for break coverage Shows the break and coverage as a full line highlight in the text editor default Does not show the break and coverage as a full line highlight in the text editor d Use window recycling Uses window recycling C Does not use window recycling default Remark See CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug Tool for details about window recycling 4 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however t
269. nnot be added to another subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to a proj ect The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add File Opens Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to a project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the cate gory name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set Selected subproject Active Project Sets the selected subproject to an active project Remove from Project Removes the selected subproject from the project The subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system with this operation When the selected subproject is the active project it cannot be removed from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation This menu is always disabled Property You can rename the selected subproject Displays the selected subproject s property in Property panel When a Mi
270. ns 271 E 5 SU Le yg Sot ho rk EN ores eae ae tat a tate ea ec ae ets Mi oe ie eed a dN ee Coa he at 273 E51 UNE DMI spoilers CRIN OR ey aca dada 274 EZ Pues eo ld rs a oe ee ors a tg en Oe ee Bia seh eee E dele eS ole ah hel oie a tial pa 275 E 5 3 Rua ciao rider Sates Sousa beet Se uek a eee a Caer eu ata Lts Genet 275 E 5 4 PAU ato Gs OLIN ps AS das lts 277 E 5 5 PUTE DIEE DUO eae oa lt a da ep eer ce ear me ia men erence amet te eee wee 277 E 5 6 Slop fuNninG a DUNA lt 3 aeae taaa ar a riot ea tae need at 278 E 5 7 Save the buld results toa Tiles tl E AA A PA A 279 REVISION ROCO apar ene ee HOR aia eee ae aa ae 280 CS V3 00 00 1 GENERAL This chapter describes the role of the CS integrated development environment for developing applications and sys tems for the microcontrollers RH850 RX and RL78 and provides an outline of its features 1 1 Introduction CS is an integrated development environment IDE Note for the microcontrollers By integrating the necessary tools for each development phase it is possible to perform all phases in software develop ment using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Emphasis is placed on making the tools work together improving development efficiency in many different situations As an example the output from the design phase is automatically reflected in the debug phase CS also has an update feature to automatically obtain this product upgrade
271. nvert Setting Dialog Box When Main Project Is Selected A eres e r Preci sere Hrs rracreenor s da Minawi Hal mietan a Sech oa cocci lar oda te EE PLAGA ADAL IEHES a Product Meme ASF TDOEA CONTE re 1 itens ROM re lisa 16 A REFIO ISA LEDO Blodico cito GP REFA i REF IONTALZ pat i REF MRAZ Epa TERATE Eat GB REF IDO Al ma i cl O a Empty Aprbsnise CC AL TOKDA Tsb 1 Pia Coord mps E Backup de pot cormpca ton fen riri gorrcarsice ee Et ee ee Figure 2 30 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box When Subproject Is Selected a Ss ernen C rr Miranda pis MILES ler e serch mcrocoriral ler E N PLAGI ROM I6HE MERA M ASFA pi E AEFIOOTA Ago QB AEFIOITA Apo BP RSF TOA Ebc BP RSF INA zea REF CO er F aenn Empty Appicatice CC AL mhi Place Cirka anpha Lel ese 7 Eshu the pred corrpca tion bba nbe gmana Cucai e After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Remark 1 When any subproject does not exist in a CubeSuite project a subproject is not displayed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 39 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Remark 2 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the conver sion the project source files and complete pro
272. nvironment for developing applications and sys tems for RH850 family RX family and RL78 family and provides an outline of its features CS is an integrated development environment IDE for RH850 family RX family and RL78 family integrating the nec essary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers Purpose Organization How to Read This Manual Conventions This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CS and design software and hardware application systems This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the CS to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices This manual can be broadly divided into the following units 1 GENERAL 2 FUNCTIONS A WINDOW REFERENCE B GLOSSARY C HOW THE MANUALS ARE ORGANIZED D INPUT CONVENTIONS E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL lt is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caut
273. o is displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 160 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on the category node the category that the user added Files node and Build tool generated files node categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Category Information 2 Notes Figure A 16 Property Panel Category Information Tab Mew category Property a Category information Category name Mer category cohort fo a folder Hote Lather ory name This amp the name of thes category The category rare can be between 1 and 200 charac Description of each category 1 Category Information The detailed information on the category is displayed and the configuration can be changed Category name Specify the name of the category to categorize files This property of the Files node and Build tool generated files node Is displayed in gray and you cannot change the attribute Default Category name of files How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 1 to 200 characters
274. of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Plug in Manager dialog box This dialog box is used to set the plug ins to be read in when this product is started Caution The settings in this dialog box are effective from the next time this product is started Figure A 49 Plug in Manager Dialog Box Checked plug ing are losded at the 4 start up These ieties are enabled of the next start up You can never uncheck a check box of the arayo t phatin that is required by the Cor Also on the Basic Punched teb t i recommended that the chackbowes of the plugin dor de israel mierocontroller of she developenent sre mot cleared Bas Funcion fddilional Function bcos he Mere Gesongtion code Generator Plain Peno y eenerate the device driver automatically tor WISU TIED bode Generator Piniew Plug in Plug in t ho penerale the device driver automatica he and to view de E Debug Donsol Plaga Debuptaraol plug in io support using siandand 1 iv ay Es hia phe m DL aidia Dl 2 E IronPython Gorms Pha in E ts s corcole where the FoniPrthm commands and the Gubsiuitet Pin Contras Fle mn Plugin to daire Fe device pin conpra n Program Analizar Phin Plug in to analyze program oe Liege Tracor Dai to disp aid pt liek usage Ol bk fie es EJ Update Marner Plug in Flug io c nminicale with C5 Llodala Manager Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open
275. of the list for the registration of a new external tool Note that this button will be disabled if 8 external tools have already been registered Delete Removes the external tool that is selected in the list R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 211 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Move Up Moves the external tool selected in the list up one row Move Down Moves the external tool selected in the list down one row 2 New registration area Use this area to configure the details of a newly added external tool Up to 8 external tools can be registered a Menu name Specify the name to use in the menu for launching the external tool up to 100 characters The name specified here will appear in the Tool menu selecting that item will launch the external tool When you finish entering the menu name the text box loses focus the name automatically replaces the New External Tool string in the list b Command path Either type in the name of the executable file including absolute path for the new external tool directly via the keyboard up to 259 characters or click the button and in the Select Program dialog box specify the name of the executable file Startup folder is automatically set to the absolute path to the folder where the executable file is located c Startup options Specify the startup options for the new external tool up to 256 characters The following plac
276. oject change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to save the build mode 2 Change the build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collec tively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time 1 When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target project on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the build mode to be changed to on the Build mode property in the Build Mode category Figure 2 71 Build mode Property 2 When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure 2 72 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box selected build mode Buildiade2 Bgpl to All Burid mode list OetaultEuald r BuildMode banica Delete Rename He Select the build mode to be changed from the build mode list The selected build mode will be displayed in Selected build mode Click the Apply to All button The build mode for the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project will be changed to the bu
277. oject tree Figure 2 56 Update Dependencies Item Build Project F7 Rebuild Project Shift F7 Clean Project Rapid Build Update Dependencies Build sample Rebuild sample La Clean sample 2 Update Dependencies of sample 4 Set Link Order of sample Stop Build Ctri F Build Mode Settings Batch Build Build Option List For the active project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies of active project Figure 2 57 Update Dependencies of active project Item Build Sy Bulld Project F7 Rebuild Project Shift F Sq Clean Project Rapid Build gt Update Dependencies Build sample Rebuild sample Update Dependencies of sample Set Link Order of sample Stop Build Ctri F Build Mode Settings Batch Build Bulld Option List are saved If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when updating file dependencies then all these files R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Aug 01 2014 Page 64 of 283 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 58 Project Tree Panel After Displaying Dependency File Project Tree 0318 A RSFS63NACKFB Microcontroller 4 CC RX Build Tool ex RX Simulator Debug Tool 5 0 File The display of the dependency files is updated on the following timings When the first build is run after the project is loaded When on the toolbar is clicked When Update Dependencies is selected from the Build menu
278. older with Explorer This menu is always disabled Windows Explorer Menu This menu is always disabled This menu is always disabled Remove from Project Copy This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project Rename This menu is always disabled Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 6 When the File node is selected Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 137 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 7 Add File A WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New c
279. ollectively change the build tool version by selecting all of the Build tool nodes and setting the property Remark 2 If you have selected a compiler package that has not been installed e g if you open a project created in another execution environment then that version is also displayed Remark 3 If the options change depending on the compiler package then the display of the build tool s properties will change according to the selected version Properties that are hidden when the version is changed are saved in the project file s settings and the values will be reproduced when the properties are displayed again Options are changed in accordance with the following rules Information about changes is displayed in the Output panel If you change from an older version to a newer version the option settings will be inherited and con verted only if necessary If you change from a newer version to an older version only identical option settings will be inherited Options that only exist in the older version will be set to the default values 2 6 Set Build Target Files Before running a build you must add the build target files such as C source file or assembly source file to the project This section explains operations on setting files in the project 2 6 1 Add a file to a project Files can be added to a project by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing f
280. ompiler Remark 7 The conversion result is output to a file as project convert information The project convert information file name is ProjectConvertinformation_projectname txt The project convert information file is output for each converted project Subproject The project convert information file is output to the project folder of the project Subproject The project convert information file is displayed the File node of the project Subproject on the Project Tree panel The output format of the project convert information file is shown below 1 lt Options not to use Build mode gt Tool name of HEW Tab name of build tool property in CS Option Tool name of HEW Tab name of build tool property in CS file name Option 2 lt Options to change Build mode gt Tool name of HEW Tab name of build tool property in CS Option of HEW project Option of CS project Tool name of HEW Tab name of build tool property in CS file name Option of HEW project gt Option of CS project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 46 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Description Options not to use Build mode If an option that has been set in a HEW project and is not used in a CS project option that has been deleted by upgrading the compiler package and HEW option exists the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CS
281. on project settings and the settings for subprojects added to a project are independent and have no effect on each other When making the same settings between the main project and subprojects or between differing subprojects select multiple nodes to set on the project tree and make the settings with the Property panel Caution A subproject cannot be added to another subproject Remark See 2 3 3 Add a new subproject and 2 4 2 Add an existing subproject for how to add subproj ects R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 LENESAS Page 15 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 1 Start a project On the tool bar click ii Stat_ to open the Start panel You can click the buttons on the panel to create a new project or open an existing one Note that the Start panel opens automatically the first time that CS starts Figure 2 5 Start Panel Learn About 25 we eoon msdng thee bori do bed out rad oan be done in 054 Go Tha Himiad cerda ha merdin cribera be efectos wea Co Create Now Project ram pee canbe crete ES Asa Groen tv alos be reisd ba in e e aii dere do da propa Creple Hew Multi oore Project 4 mesa bol Boece pai lor recipies ad rre opa Cancel o ilis 1 ss arado A O A p abr bering habana ard ca an amas bad aro a area debug fade lar han Open Existing Propect E Lok Eh paces ol Er Ln 40 bs state dect los des Pollos br Ascent Propecia Fave Pacts E Jaren eg i Open Existing amp siudiorCube
282. ondition setting area top Second condition setting area bottom via the following button Only the column meeting both condition 1 and condition 2 is displayed This is mutually exclusive to the OR button Only the column meeting either condition 1 or condition 2 is displayed This is mutually exclusive to the AND button Function buttons Function Displays the memory mapping information on the Memory Mapping Profiler panel under the specified filtering conditions If filtering results linked to panel was performed then all display filters linked to the panel conducted prior to this are deleted Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 183 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Dependent Projects Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to reference set the dependent projects Figure A 27 Dependent Projects Settings Dialog Box Dependent Projects Settings Project 1 __Am _a _oea _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __________ _ _ _ _ ETT Dependent project F MahProjeci subPrapeci 7 SubPropecid Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Project menu select Dependent Projects Settings Ca
283. onverted into a CS project is output using format dddd mmmm dd yyyy hh mm ss AM PM IDE version and date The version of CS and the date are output Compiler package version The compiler package used in a PM project and the version and the compiler package used in a CS project and the version are output The version of the compiler package used in a CS projects is the latest version in the compiler packages which are installed in the CS environment Options not to use Build mode If an option that has been set in a PM project and is not used in a CS project option that has been deleted by upgrading the compiler package and PM option exists the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CS Option Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user cre ated build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that PM pro vides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CS for Tool name does not exist Options to change Build mode If an option that has been set in a PM project and has been changed to use in a CS project option that the range the parameter can be specified has been changed and option that has been changed by upgrading the compiler package exists the inf
284. ool provided by CS Debug Only Select this to debug a load module file or hex file generated with a build tool other than the one provided by CS i e creates a debug dedicated project See E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on how to create and use the debug dedicated proj ect 4 Specify the project name and location to create the project file Specify the name of the project and the location to create the project file in Project name and Place If you don t create a folder with the project name under the specified location clear the Make the project folder check box Caution When directly entering the location to create the project file enter it as an absolute path 5 Specify the reuse of the file structure of an existing project When creating a project that reuses the file structure of an existing project check Pass the file composition of an existing project to the new project and specify the location of the project filename to reuse in Project to be passed Caution You cannot specify an e studio CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop or PM proj ect file If you wish to copy an existing e studio CubeSuite High performance Embedded Workshop or PM project open the project in CS then save it as a CS project see 2 4 8 Convert an e stu dio project into a CS project RX 2 4 9 Convert a CubeSuite project into a CS project 2 4 10 Convert a HEW project into a CS project 2 4 11 Conv
285. ore by using build tool CC RH provided by CS A boot loader project is used to set application projects configuring a project for multi core Caution This item is displayed only when microcontrollers for RH850 multi core are selected in 2 Select the microcontroller Remark The following start up source files are generated in the project folder These files are also registered in the project tree File Name Description boot asm For defining the processing from the occurrence of a reset to a branch to each application project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 19 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS File Name Description iodefine h For defining I O registers vecttbl asm For defining the interrupt vector table Application for Multi core CC RH Select this to create an application project for multi core by using build tool CC RH provided by CS Caution This item is displayed only when microcontrollers for RH850 multi core are selected in 2 Select the microcontroller Remark The following start up source files are generated in the project folder These files are also registered in the project tree File Name Description cstartm asm For defining the start up routine for each application iodefine h For defining I O registers main c For defining the empty main function Library CC RH CC RX CC RL Select this to generate a library file for a user library by using the build t
286. ormation is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CS Option of PMr project gt Option of CS project Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user cre ated build mode Debug Build and Release Build are the build modes that PM pro vides by default They differ depending on whether the debug information output option is set or not Other Options is output if Tab name of build tool property in CS for Tool name does not exist R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 53 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 12 Change the microcontroller You can change the microcontroller to be used in the created project 1 Select the change for the microcontroller Select the Microcontroller node and select Change microcontroller on the context menu The following message dialog box will open Figure 2 42 Message Dialog Box Requires sawing the current project do enable fo restore the current progect stalus ater changing ihe macromon troller Contrhue saving and process Pe 50 sea a The project needs to be saved before making the following steps The current project is overwritten by clicking the OK button To continue the process click the OK button Remark When multiple Microcontroller nodes for the projects using the same microcontroller are selected the microcontroller settings can
287. orted in this version Rearrange Commands Function buttons Button Keyboard Opens the Rearrange Commands dialog box for changing the arrangement includ ing addition and deletion of menu items and tool bar buttons in the Main window Function Opens the Customize Keyboard dialog box to assign customized items to keys on the keyboard Close Cancels the toolbar menu customization setting and closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 240 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE New Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new toolbar to appear in the Main window Figure A 55 New Toolbar Dialog Box The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog box click the New button Description of each area 1 Toolbar name Type in the name of the new toolbar directly via the keyboard UltraToolbar1 is specified by default 2 Location Select the location for the new toolbar from the following drop down list The location specified here is the location where the new toolbar will appear immediately after it is created tool bars can be moved freely by dragging and dropping Docked Top Displays the toolbar at the top of the Main window default Docked Bottom Displays the toolbar at
288. ou cannot drag and drop a folder and file onto this area simultaneously m Displaying the dependency file When there is a dependency file for a source file added to the project the dependency file is displayed under the source file The source file without a dependency file The source file with a dependency file The display of the dependency files is updated on the following timings When the first build is run after the project is loaded When on the toolbar is clicked When Update Dependencies is selected from the Build menu When Update Dependencies of active project is selected from the Build menu Remark 1 This function is valid only when the Show dependency files in project tree check box in the General Build category of the Option dialog box is selected Remark 2 Information on the dependency files displayed on the project tree is not saved in the project file n Displaying the editing file When the file added to the project is edited in the Editor panel exclude the dependency files and the file is not saved once the file name is followed by If the file is saved will be deleted The file that is saved The file that is not saved after editing o Displaying the source file in boldface that the individual build option is set The source file icon whose option is different from the project general options individual compile options or indi vidual assemble options is cha
289. path in Favorite Projects ect 2 Register to Favorite Proj The current project path is added to 2 path in Favorite Projects ect 3 Register to Favorite Proj The current project path is added to 3 path in Favorite Projects ect 4 Register to Favorite Proj The current project path is added to 4 path in Favorite Projects ect Add Shows the cascading menu to add a project to a subproject Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to a project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add a new subproject to a project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to a project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to a project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node to the root of the File node This allows the cat egory name to be changed The default category name is New category The new category name can be changed to the same name as the existing Category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set Project Active Project Sets the selected project or subproject to an active project Dependent Projects Settings Opens the Dependent Projects Settings dialog box to set the dependent projects
290. pecific for each microcontroller Note 2 This manual is specific for each compiler R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 258 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 D INPUT CONVENTIONS D INPUT CONVENTIONS This section describes input conventions D 1 Input Conventions Below are input conventions for configuring information in the panels and dialog boxes provided by CS 1 Character sets The following character sets are allowed for input Table D 1 List of Character Sets Character Sets Outline ASCII Single byte numbers letters and punctuation Shift JIS Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji and sin gle byte Katakana EUC JP Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji and sin gle byte Katakana UTF 8 Double byte letters numbers punctuation Hiragana Katakana and Kanji including Chinese and single byte Katakana 2 Numbers Numbers may be input in the following base formats Table D 2 List of Number Bases Number Bases Outline Decimal number Starts with 1 to 9 followed by a sequence of the digits 0 to 9 and 0 Hexadecimal number Starts with Ox followed by a sequence of the digits O to 9 and the letters a to f As for capital letter small letter of the alphabet it is pretermission D 2 Displaying Icons at Locations of Input Errors In some of the panels and dialog boxes provided by CS the a icon will appear at
291. pen Project from the Project menu with CS and then select a project file cspj 1 Select the settings for conversion When a CubeSuite project file is selected the following message dialog box will open Figure 2 27 Message Dialog Box Question Q0268001 F you selec No open a dalog to change other device or other compiler If you select the Yes button the CubeSuite project settings are left unchanged and the conversion to a CS proj ect is carried out To change the microcontroller or project name click the No button continue to 2 2 Select the project for conversion settings The Project Convert Setting dialog box will open Figure 2 28 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box project vith OM button you can change thoes proa bingo at anca Wh you press Eb PA ution eta changing any seeing ea copa eects re rede in Eo er pl Si the talented pois rd the dd pets Bae beck in Long ameter bhii oia i paj ena Hobhipatrrorce Enbedded teehee pete ployse be gure Losada de deceo lor cut propi The Project area shows the configuration of conversion target projects as a tree select the project for carrying out the conversion settings R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 38 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Set the conversion target project When you select the project the area on the right shows the conversion target project setting items Figure 2 29 Project Co
292. played and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end bcA build mode name Perform a clean Launch without displaying the Main window build all the projects included in specified project file name with the build mode specified by build mode name and then exit If a project does not have the build mode specified by build mode name then the build mode is copied based on the DefaultBuild and the build is per formed If the build mode specified by build mode name is not defined in the project specified by project file name then an error will be displayed and processing will end If build mode name is omitted then the build will use the DefaultBuild If project file name is omitted then an error will be displayed and processing will end lpAplug in namely plug in name Start CS without displaying the Main window and with loading the specified plug ins in the Plugins folder In plug in name specify the name of the folder in which each DLL file is saved Note that folder names are case insensitive You can specify multiple plug in names by separating them with commas You can also specify the Ip option itself multiple times Each DLL will be loaded When a plug in with the same name is specified for the np option the option specified backward of the command lin
293. pplicationiC0 FX Project narra remplie Place TEk 4 if Mas te project toke Cork Waco mp lesa ria be rtp T Para the file compociiion of an exhing praeci bo the re propeci 5 Ppeti in bee pas oor composting ies an the dreected peopect folder do sa ree peopel folds Function buttons Grese Gara Hap Remark When a subproject is created the title bar says Create Subproject R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 114 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 4 Create Project Dialog Box Opened From Create New Multi core Project Area On Start Panel F Se Br NADA 1 Leg micracontral ber A Seen mecrocortrall er linias HA Product hame RIF 701201 E hema ROM size KE yes 2 Code Ras 2048 mi a Cura Flesh Ral Mat RHEBOETN S emal RAN ze Bsa a RHGSHEte FOC1 Local FAME Tesh Local RAMPEL47762 Global R4M 110598 S q Emito RAMH Pa i Ad tional information Mumbar of Coren 2 3 Kung of project Boot Loader fer Mubh om LL AR Propacl parra sample mul 4 Place CLs ers soonoononon Documents Maka the paat dar Cilsersteacoaoacooi Da urerisaarpe_ sub ade mlie ngi 6 A Crealo an application project with a bool loader propa Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open 1 When creating a main project Click the Start button in the toolbar to
294. pressing the Ctrl key then press Space key R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 129 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE f Expand collapse a node You can expand the selected node by the following procedure Select the node and then press the key You can collapse the selected node by the following procedure Select the node and then press the Shift key g Adding a file You can add a file by one of the following procedures The files are added below the File node lt 1 gt Adding an existing file Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the File menu The Add Existing File dialog box will open Select the file to be added Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node Then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu The Add Existing File dialog box will open Select the file to be added Copy the file using such as Explorer and then point the mouse to this area Select Paste from the Edit menu Drag a file using such as Explorer and drop it onto the location in this area where you want to add it to Remark If you drag the file using such as Explorer and drop it onto the empty space below the lower project tree it is assumed that you have dropped it onto the Main project lt 2 gt Adding a new file Select either one of the Project node Subpro
295. project In a HEW project Ina PM project Remark 4 When the input for Place violates any restriction the following messages are shown in the tooltip Message Description Some project names are too long For project settings not selected in this area the abso Make it within 259 characters lute path of the conversion target project file exceeds 259 characters The device is not specified in some The device list of the microcontroller selected for a projects Select the project in tree view project that is not selected in this area does not and please set the device include the settings for that project This message is shown when CS does not support the device for the e studio CubeSuite or PM proj ect or when a device was not set after the HEW proj ect was opened 2 New microcontroller area Carry out the microcontroller settings for the conversion target project Remark This area will be invalid when a PM workspace Is converted and the main project node is selected a Microcontroller Select a microcontroller type to use in the new project You can select the item below RH850 RX RL78 R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 123 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE b New microcontroller area Select a microcontroller to use in the new project lt 1 gt Microcontroller search box You can search a microcontroller selected in the list of microcontrollers simply
296. project ini sis aa a 70 2 7 6 Adaa DUNG MOOS AAA A A oe eo bac tw te 71 2 7 7 Change the build mode rss sa arate wid ARCAS Gre ee RAR 73 2 7 8 Delete a Bula Mode ia he a ea ee ee ae eee le ee eee oe es 74 2 7 9 Set the current build options as the standard for the project 0 ccc eee 74 2 8 Ruma Buld is a Wake oad ce eh e eR o Rs Ce Ge 75 2 8 1 Run a build of updated files 0 0 eens 77 2 8 2 Rua Bulla AM TIES sss cae tare xcets ad A eae a ead 78 2 8 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations 2 0 0 ee ee eee ees 79 2 8 4 Run builds in batch with build modes 0 0 00 eee eee eee eens 80 2 8 5 Compile assemble individual fileS 1 2 0 eee eee eee ens 80 2 8 6 SOPUN A DUI ete as Coun buat Sotet a ton Ghee ute eyes eg aie Seated 82 2 8 7 Save the build results to a file 4 aed wate Bene A ene ihe ele bores 82 2 8 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files 0 0 ee eee ees 82 2 9 Save Ine Pro ec rile 2 1 42 c1icut em etdeaced eid iia ad aid 84 2 9 1 Save the project file with a different name o o ooooooooon ee eee eens 84 2 9 2 Sale ra aise a A dea 85 2 9 3 Pack and save the project and this product o o oooooooo eee eee ees 85 2 9 4 Ao A II eae tee ein aoe ee ie re Seas 89 2 10 Change Ine Window LAVO Ulea srt dera a ies he oO ee ee a ee aed 90 2 10 1 AUlOMatiCally mde Panels unas 4 Jott Soe ee E Sed ivan 90 2 10 2 FOSE seal WV CLG VW aaa e ed 90 2 10 3 DOCIWINC
297. r package used in e age used in CS project Version 2 studio project Version gt Compiler pack 4 lt O0ptions not to use Build mode gt Tool name of ef studio Tab name of build tool property in CS Option 5 lt Options to change Build mode gt studio Tab name of build tool property in CS Option of e studio project gt Option of CS project Tool name of e Number Description Time and date on which a project was converted The time and date on which an e studio project was converted into a CS project is output using format dddd mmmm dd yyyy hh mm ss AM PM IDE version and date The version of CS and the date are output Compiler package version The compiler package used in an e studio project and the version and the compiler package used in a CS project and the version are output The version of the compiler package used in a CS projects is the latest version in the compiler packages which are installed in the CS environment Options not to use Build mode If an option that has been set in an e studio project and is not used in a CS project option that has been deleted by upgrading the compiler package and e studio option exists the information is output for each build mode in the format shown below Tool name Tab name of build tool property in CS Option Build modes are output in the following order Debug Build Release Build user cre ated build mode Debug Build and
298. rent caret Note that the help is only for warning error messages ENESAS Page 172 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Error List panel This panel is used to list the information of messages output from the build tool error information Remark This panel can be zoomed in and out by in the tool bar or by moving the mouse wheel forward or backward while holding down the Ctrl key Figure A 23 Error List Panel Error Lust le Toolbar mE Warmings F Humber Message File Lire Project e ps Fa W marc SS 40520012 Parece restariz here after LE previous Syntax error 1 es E0520164 manc 301E0520 16 Ex pected a declaration maing 30 sample Ra mipi E 2 marnci240520077 Th0 declaration has no Gp WO520077 aro ele ar Loe siecle maine 29 sampi PRA mip Q3 ENs20169 hesetupciME0520164Expected a declaration hwsetupo 70 sample RXmipj mi main pa sample _Rmipi The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu Error List panel dedicated items Edit menu Error List panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Error List Description of each area 1 Error information list area List the information of messages output from the build tool error information The displayed error information can be sorted by clicking each column ascending order ascending order Description
299. roject tab Subproject node Subproject tab Microcontroller node Microcontroller Information tab Configuration Tool for Multi core node Boot Loader tab RH850 Design Tool node See CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Pin Configurator Code Generator Pin View Operation and CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Code Gen erator Peripheral Function Operation for details about tabs Build Tool node See the CS Integrated Development Environment User s oe for a debug dedicated project Manual Build Tool Operation for details about tabs ote Build Tool node Build Options tab For a Debug dedicated project Debug Tool node See the CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Debug Tool for details about tabs R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 148 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Analyze Tool node See the CubeSuite Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Analysis for details about this tab File File Information tab See the CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build Tool Operation for details about the tabs other than the File Information tab Category node Category Information tab Note For details on the debug dedicated project see E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Remark When more than two components are selected in Project Tree panel only the tab that i
300. roller A None Build Tool RHESO Simulator Dg Drop a file s here j Download files abs sample abs b Add a folder Drag a folder s from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the File node on the project tree The Add Folder and File dialog box will open Figure E 8 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections G source file 20 Header file thy inc Assemble tile asm 3 Object module tile S obj 0 Load module file Grabe m cut Text file bt subholder level to search In the dialog box select the types of the files to be added and specify the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the debug dedicated project At this time you can select multiple file types by left clicking while hold ing down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected And then click the OK button 2 Creating and adding an empty file Select the File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 264 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 9 Add File Dialog Box Adding a File File typa source file Ec Header tile Oh m0 All fikest a Empiy source file mahue File locatidre_G work Debue Only
301. s Remove from Project Removes the selected file from the project The file itself is not deleted from the file system Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the selected characters are copied to the clip board Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to other project that file name is also changed Change Extension Opens a message dialog box to confirm whether to change the file extension Clicking on the Yes button in the dialog box will open the Character String Input dialog box in which the extension of the selected file can be changed When multiple files are selected they are changed at one time Note that this menu item is disabled if the name of the selected file cannot be changed or the file cannot be removed from the project or the build tool is in operation Property Displays the selected file s property on the Property panel 8 When the Build tool generated files node is selected Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 9 When a Category node is selected R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 139 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project Add File Opens th
302. s CC RL the following start up source files are generated in the project folder These files are also registered in the project tree File Name Description cstart asm For defining the start up routine from the occurrence of a reset to a branch to the main function The memory address and stack area need to be modified to match the microcontroller used iodefine h For defining I O registers main c For defining the empty main function R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 117 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE C Application CC RX Select this to generate the load module file and hex file from a C source file only a file that has a main func tion and C source files by using build tool CC RX provided by CS The generated file will be the debug target The following start up source files are generated in the project folder The files marked with OK in the Registration in Project Tree column are also registered in the project tree When necessary also register the files marked with in the project tree Remark File Name Description Registration in Project Tree For defining the main function OK ProjectName c dbsct c For setting up standard sections OK hwsetup c For initializing hardware intprg c For defining interrupt functions OK iodefine h For defining I O registers lowlvl src For defining low level I O functions source file for a
303. s Selected ee Propet ratio Eal Preci sere Hra merai a a et Fi cal Pto atroces a 7 mm Uet a Prei Hare ASF SEEFF B GEIGE a Ged AE Creta FAM yae Etica 131072 i Abkira norra on skep PLA E REFF es eer E REPS Oe a ee el I REPS re FP dear W AEFSS OTB Se eg el E REPS Ea FP dean n ee el Selec peat n Senior AELE fc SYSTEM 7 Hie propect nd ol piojaci Empty Appike EC AA 7 Frosi pere Pros Fira orks empl Pryd meta ja e Facwae A Badoo the poat correos bon fen ober gomari Cancel Help After setting the microcontroller to be used for the conversion target project and project type name and place of creation settings click the OK button Caution Confirm that the microcontroller is selected before clicking the OK button Remark 1 Select session is displayed only when multiple sessions exist in a project Remark 2 If you select Backup the project composition files after conversion immediately after the conver sion the project source files and complete project are packed up and saved Remark 3 See Project Convert Seiting dialog box for details about each setting item c Convert the CS project The HEW project is converted to the CS project When opening from a HEW project file the project is converted in accordance with the following rules A HEW project is converted to a project with the same name as the original project After conversion the proj ect fi
304. s and subprojects See E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL for details on a debug dedicated project Projects can have subprojects added to the level beneath them The subproject s settings information is saved to a subproject file cssp Subprojects for example are used in the following ways When also creating a project to create library files used in the project create a project to create library files as a subproject When developing the same application system for different microcontrollers create the projects that differ for the microcontroller as subprojects Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 14 of 283 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS When subprojects are added this manual call the project main project as opposed to its subprojects Project is acommon term for the main project and subprojects Figure 2 4 Project Tree Panel When Subprojects Added A RSF51111AxFL Microcontroller Gil Code Generator Design Tool AL OC RX Build Tool nl AX Simulator Debug Tool lt P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool oD File E sub Subproject lili RSFSGINACXFB Microcontroller l f 4 CC RX Build Tool bora RX Simulator Debug Tool E Program Analyzer Analyze Tool l Ei File iz sub2 Subproject Pl RSFSG3NACXFB Microcontroller A CC R Build Tool Supnicied S RX Simulator Debug Tool Program Analyzer Analyze Tool LP File Main project In additi
305. s color in the Output panel and file Background color Default color names with warnings are displayed in this color in the Project Tree panel Font color Red Error messages are displayed in this color in the Output panel and file Background color LightGray names with errors are displayed in this color in the Project Tree panel R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 206 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE ltem Example Description Reserved word AaqBbtic Font color Brown The reserved words of your compiler assembler are displayed in this color in Background color Default color the Editor panel Comment AaBhtic Font color Green Comments in the case of a C source file are displayed in this color Background color Default color in the Editor panel String literal AaBbcc Font color Gray String literals are displayed in this color in the Editor panel Background color Default color Control code Saber Font color Teal Control characters are displayed in this Background color Default color color in the Output panel Highlight Font color White Highlighted areas in plug in products and the like are displayed in this color Background color Magenta Changed value SaAbee Font color Tan Values changed via the execution of a user program are displayed in this color Background color Cream Edit value AaBbCec Font color
306. s common to all the components is displayed If the property is modified that is taken effect to the selected components all of which are common to all Dialog boxes opened from the Property panel The following dialog boxes are opened from the Property panel Character String Input dialog box See Character String Input dialog box for details Text Edit dialog box See Text Edit dialog box for details Path Edit dialog box See Path Edit dialog box for details Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Undoes any property changes being done Cut Cuts the selected text to the clip board while editing the property Copies the selected text in the property to the clip board Pastes the contents of the clip board to the property while editing the property Delete Deletes the selected text while editing the property Select All Selects all the text in the selected property while editing the property Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Quick Find tab target Help menu Property panel dedicated items Open Help for Property Panel Displays the help of this panel or the currently displayed tab Context menu Undoes any property changes being done Cuts the selected text to the clip board while editing the property Copies the selected text in the property to the clip board Pastes the contents of the clip board to the property while editing the property
307. s product 1 Hardware environment Processor At least 1 GHz support for hyper threading multi core CPU Main memory At least 1 GB 2 GB or higher for Windows 64 bit OS 2 GB or higher recommended Display Resolution at least 1 204 x 768 at least 65 536 colors Interface USB 2 0 2 Software environment Windows Vista 32 bit OS 64 bit OS Windows 7 32 bit OS 64 bit OS Windows 8 32 bit OS 64 bit OS Windows 8 1 32 bit OS 64 bit OS Microsoft NET Framework 4 Microsoft Visual C 2010 SP1 runtime libraries Internet Explorer 7 or higher 3 Supported target environments Emulator ECUBE RL78 Full spec emulator RH850 E1 RH850 RX RL78 E20 RH850 RX RL78 EZ Emulator RX RL78 Simulator R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 9 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter covers the basic operations of CS and the procedure of build using CS 2 1 Overview The procedure starting from the startup of CS creating and building projects and up to saving projects is shown as fol lows 1 Start CS Start CS see 2 2 Start CS 2 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one see 2 3 Create a Project and 2 4 Manipulate a Project 3 Set the build tool version Set the build tool version see 2 5 Change the Build Tool Version 4 Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update
308. s product by copying them in a folder Paste This menu is always disabled Rename You can rename the selected project Property Displays the selected project s property in Property panel 2 When a Subproject node is selected Build Actively project Builds the active project When a dependent project is set for the active project a build of the depen dent project is also run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Actively project Clean Actively project Rebuilds the active project When a dependent project is set for the active project a rebuild of the depen dent project is also run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cleans the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the subproject file of the selected subproject with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu Displays the Windows Explorer menu corresponding to the subproject file for the selected subproject R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 135 of 283 CS V3 00 00 3 4 A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows the cascading menu to add subprojects files and Category nodes to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to a project The subproject ca
309. s to the file extension see g Adding a file Open with Internal Editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Open with Selected Applica tion Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the designated application Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the selected file with Explorer Windows Explorer Menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 Displays the Windows Explorer menu corresponding to the selected file Shows the cascading menu to add files and Category nodes to the project ENESAS Page 138 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new Category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a Category node with the same name as the existing Category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 level
310. s via the network making it simple to main tain the environment required for software development free downloadable tools excluded Note An integrated development environment is a development environment integrating the necessary tools for all phases of software development including preparation design implementation and debugging into a single platform framework Remark In addition to CS emulators and on chip debugging emulators emulators for microcontrollers with on chip debugging facilities built in are provided as well as a real time OS package for developing systems using real time OS making a wide range of development possible 1 2 Features CS s features are shown below 1 2 Project management Manage project information including source file structure build options and settings for connecting to the debug tool Design The pin assignment function makes it possible to output reports called device pin list and device top view as files by inputting the pin configuration status of the microcontroller The code generation function can output source code device driver programs corresponding to peripheral func tions provided by the microcontroller e g systems ports and interrupt by selecting and entering the information required for control in the CS panels Coding A tree view of the files included in the project appears in a CS panel and the files can be edited by linking an edi tor to CS
311. save location project you must re register the files to the project Caution 6 Emulator drivers are not saved If you use a pack on another computer you must install the drivers sep arately R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 L ENESAS Page 88 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 4 Close a project To close a project select the File or Project menu gt gt Close Project Figure 2 100 Close Project Item UA Create New Project Ctrl Shift s Remove from Project shift Delete When the open project or changed files are not saved a Message dialog box is displayed Figure 2 101 Message Dialog Box Project has been changed Save Yes Mo acarcat toto Click the Yes button to save click the No button to not save R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 89 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Change the Window Layout This section describes how to change the CS window layout 2 10 1 Automatically hide panels Panels support the auto hide feature When the auto hide feature is in use unused panels are minimized on the edge of the frame making it possible to dis play more information at one time 1 Enabling the auto hide feature To enable the auto hide feature click on the panel to hide to select it Right click on the panel s title bar and select Auto hide or click on the panel s title bar Ej When an auto hidden panel loses the focus a mini
312. selected error information file and line Jump to Next Message Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the error information next to the currently selected error information file and line Help for Message Displays the help with regard to the message of the currently selected error infor mation Note that the help is only for warning error messages R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 175 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Mapping Profiler panel This panel is used to display the memory mapping information of load modules collected by the build tool The amount of used memory can be reduced by analyzing the information Remark This panel can be zoomed in and out by in the tool bar or by moving the mouse wheel forward or backward while holding down the Ctrl key Figure A 24 Memory Mapping Profiler Panel Build options about the selected memory mapping at E Setting state of common options 4 modes sample lib c program Files LRefadasd Electronica 25700 0C AXA E 02 00d1Bi01 16qrx exe 1 24 cxv1 E La Details of the selected memory mapping omporing mode Lotes resu of profiing gt Selected Kem 8 20 2014 5 35 PM hecked lem E Type V Size Bytes Va fa Program Constant Oni nicializod Data Iimitiailizad Data Data Others SEack 30 Stack Ss1I Grand SUBA DC Sl 17 Summary Load Module Sections
313. sizing Resizes the window while displaying areas that were not visible before Resizes the window without displaying areas that were not visible before default Tab width Specify the number of tab columns Either enter a number between 1 and 16 directly via the keyboard or specify a number via the buttons The default is 8 Note that clicking on the OK or Apply button while this item remains blank causes the tab setting to remain at the previously saved value Select the file opened with text editor in project tree When the Editor panel is activated the file currently being opened is selected in the Project Tree panel default Even if the Editor panel is activated the file currently being opened is not selected in the Project Tree panel Show overlay icons for Windows Explorer in project tree Displays overlay icons for Windows Explorer in the Project Tree panel Does not display overlay icons for Windows Explorer in the Project Tree panel default Caution The change of the setting is reflected after this product restarts Location of a close button for a splitted panel Use this area to select the location of a close button for a split panel via the following drop down list Right edge of the tab area Displays to the right edge in the tab area default All tabs Displays to the right edge of the title in all tabs Active tab Displays to the right edge of the t
314. sm For defining the start up routine from the occurrence of a reset to a branch to the main function iodefine h For defining I O registers main c For defining the empty main function vecttbl asm For defining the interrupt vector table Remark 2 If the build tool is CC RX the following start up source files are generated in the project folder The files marked with OK in the Registration in Project Tree column are also registered in the project tree When necessary also register the files marked with in the project tree File Name Description Registration in Project Tree ProjectName c For defining the main function OK dbsct c For setting up standard sections OK hwsetup c For initializing hardware intprg c For defining interrupt functions OK iodefine h For defining I O registers lowlvl src For defining low level I O functions source file for assembler lowsrc c For defining low level I O functions lowsrc h Prototypes for low level I O functions resetprg c For defining initialization for C language sbrk c For defining the function for allocating the heap memory sbrk h For defining the heap size stacksct h For defining pragma for the stack typedefine h For defining typedefine for the types used in sbrk c etc vect h Prototypes for interrupt vector functions vecttbl c For defining the interrupt vector table Remark 3 If the build tool i
315. solits path of the man project folder z m Cancel Help In Text enter the command to be executed with one item per line The commands can be specified up to 1023 characters per line up to 64 lines Remark 1 This property supports placeholders If a line is double clicked in Placeholder the placeholder will be reflected in Text Remark 2 When python is described in the first line the contents from the second line to the last line are regarded as the script of the Python console and then executed when running a clean The placeholders can be described in the script If you click the OK button the entered commands are displayed as subproperties Figure E 19 Commands executed in the project cleaning Property After Setting Commands n mr cleaning 1 m E L L a a nia a A ed the project Commands m EEn exe cu To change the specified commands you can use the button or enter the command directly in the text box of the sub property Caution CS does not provide the make command E 4 2 Set the build mode You can collectively change the settings of the commands executed according to the purpose of the build The commands set in E 4 1 Set the commands are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the command settings every time i e the command settings can be made with each build mode
316. ssembler lowsrc c lowsrc h For defining low level I O functions Prototypes for low level I O functions resetprg c For defining initialization for C language sbrk c For defining the function for allocating the heap memory sbrk h For defining the heap size stacksct h For defining pragma for the stack For defining typedefine for the types used in sbrk c etc typedefine h vect h Prototypes for interrupt vector functions vecttbl c For defining the interrupt vector table Empty Application CC RH CC RX Select this to generate the load module file by using build tool CC RH CC RX provided by CS The generated file will be the debug target Sample startup programs are not generated when the project is created Boot Loader for Multi core CC RH Select this to create a boot loader project for multi core by using build tool CC RH provided by CS A boot loader project is used to set application projects configuring a project for multi core Caution This item is displayed only when microcontrollers for RH850 multi core are selected in the Using microcontroller area Remark The following start up source files are generated in the project folder These files are also registered in the project tree File Name Description For defining the processing from the occurrence of a reset to a branch to each application project boot asm For defining I O registers iodefine h
317. t file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box in order to save the settings of the currently open project to a project file with a different name Save Target Saves the file that is currently in focus Save Target As Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the contents of the file cur rently in focus with a different name Target Save Option Opens the Save Settings dialog box to set the encoding and newline code to use for the file being edited in the Editor panel Save All Saves all files being updated in the Editor panel and the project Page Setup R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 Opens the Page Setup dialog box provided by Windows for printing ENESAS Page 101 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Print Opens the Print dialog box provided by Windows in order to print the con tents of the active Editor panel Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window to preview the source file before printing Recent Files Displays a list of recently used files in a cascading menu to open those files 1 Recent File Uses this item to open the most recently used file 2 Recent File Uses this item to open the second most recently used file 3 Recent File Uses this item to open the third most recently used file 4 Recent File Uses this item to open the fourth most recently used file Recent Projec
318. t is added to the favorites menu You can add the currently open project to the menu as a favorite project up to four projects From the Project menu select Favorite Projects gt gt 1 4 Register to Favorite Project the path of the currently open project is registered under the Project menu gt gt Favorite Projects R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 29 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 19 Register to Favorite Project Item a fy 1 Favorite Project ois 2 Favorite Project 3 p I m P EE A Pavonte F Ec P 3 Favorite Project AG 1 Register to Favorite Project dy 2 Register to Favorite Project Z 3 Register to Favorite Project E 4 Register to Favorite Project m CE Figure 2 20 Favorite Projects Item After Registering a Project AER 1 C work sample sampletpj 2 Favonte Project 3 Favorite Project 4 Favorite Project E 1 Register to Favorite Project TRl 2 Register to Favorite Project SR 3 Register to Favorite Project 4 Register to Favorite Project 2 4 4 Remove a subproject from the project To remove a subproject registered to a project from that project select the Subproject node on the project tree and select Remove from Project on the context menu In addition the subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system Figure 2 21 Remove from Project Item UN sub Subproject Ases E Build sampl
319. t state of the innermost outlining section in which the cursor lies when you are in a nested collapsed section Toggle All Outlining Toggles the collapsed state of all outlining nodes setting them all to the same expanded or collapsed state If there is a mixture of collapsed and expanded nodes all nodes will be expanded Stop Outlining Stops code outlining and remove all outlining information from source files Start Automatic Outlining Starts automatic code outlining and automatically displayed in supported source files Advanced Displays a cascading menu for performing an advanced operation for the Editor panel R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Page 103 of 283 CS V3 00 00 Increase Line Indent A WINDOW REFERENCE Increases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Decrease Line Indent Decreases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Uncomment Lines Removes the first set of line comment delimiters from the start of the cur rent cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This opera tion will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Comment Lines Places line comment delimiters at the start of the current cursor line appro priate to the current language e g C This operation will only be avail able when the language of the current source
320. ted in the project building Commands executed in the project building 0 Gommends executed m ihe project cleaning Commands executed in the project ckanme h Build mode Selects ihe build mode name to be used during build Below are how to set the commands Setting the command when running a build Setting the command when running a clean 1 Setting the command when running a build Set the command to be executed when running a build see E 5 1 Run a build in the Commands executed in the project building property In this property set the command to execute the required build processing e g make Figure E 14 Commands executed in the project building Property If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 267 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL Figure E 15 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit mt Text Plsceholder Placeholder Vale Description ictieProjectbr Gc work DebueOnly Absolute path of the active project folder ActreeProeciName Deburirk Active project name BuildiModellame Detail Budd Busld made mame MamnProjsctDir Ccwork DebugOnly Absolits path of the man project folder z m Cancel Help In Text enter the command to be executed with one item per line The commands can be specified up to 1023 characters per line up to 64 lines Remark 1 This property supports placeholders If
321. that exceeds four is not registered The project settings after conversion of those in the PM project group are set to the same set tings as the project listed first in the workspace file In addition files are not registered If you wish to organize each of the projects into a single project after conversion add each project as a subproject to a single project When loading a workspace that includes projects without build tools specified build tools are set according to the microcontroller Only projects that can be loaded by PM and built normally can be loaded into CS If there is already a subproject file in the same folder and with the same file name excluding the file extension as the project file then the project file will not be saved correctly Change the name of the main project or the subproject on the project tree When only one project exists in a PM workspace the project will be converted to the main project 2 When opening from a PM project file prj a Select the project for conversion settings When a PM project file is selected the Project Convert Setting dialog box will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 50 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 40 Project Convert Setting Dialog Box Select Che propecis tor Che pek led boo sed chars Tht Se 10 Oe 15 heey Seki aaverd proyect with Cil bodor pos can cheese bota propecte HE wi oo Whon yea presa ho EJ bution A
322. the Create Project dialog box Figure E 2 Create Project Dialog Box Creating a Debug dedicated Project Wecrocorrinal ker Lema merocorimiler E Sean h menmcenimilar Uria la AHESOF IL Product Mame RE 2010 MEA FP internal ROM o cet Bytes Cade Flach Ree PU Ae do Me RIF TO AFP Gian su Data Flair MD RIFT APRS bpm k krmak RAM size mo a 5 a a m PFE E RIF TOW IAF PY Ilgin PAE E T lt Leda E RIFON SAFA hipan Rat niira ROMSI7EA B ETE 00s AFA itpin MM RIF TOUS AFA icin Kira al proyect D Project garme Debain Place vps 7 Make the project folder Cork CasbuapOraby Debug n kaipi O Paja te file composition of an esbibng growed ho the nie project Pott do be pa al oor composta files an de dreected protec loker do srep poeci okie When you click the Create button after configuring all settingsN t the project file of the debug dedicated project is cre ated in the location specified in the Place item and the structure of the created debug dedicated project is displayed as a tree in the Project Tree panel Note See 2 3 2 Create a new project or 2 3 3 Add a new subproject for details on how to configure each item Figure E 3 Project Tree Panel After Creating a Debug dedicated Project Prepac Tres E 235835 TT Debug M RIF O1010XAFP Microcontralle In a debug dedicated project e None Build Tool the build tool name is shown as E gt RHESO Simulator Debug Too
323. the bottom of the Main window Docked Left Displays the toolbar on the leftedge of the Main window Docked Right Displays the toolbar on the rightedge of the Main window Floating Displays the toolbar above the Main window without docking it Function buttons Button Function Creates a new toolbar with the specified information and closes this dialog box The new toolbar appears in the list on the User Setting dialog box s Toolbars tab with its check box selected R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7CENESAS Page 241 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Button Function Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 242 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Rename Toolbar dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the name of a toolbar created by the user Figure A 56 Rename Toolbar Dialog Box RenameToolbar Toolbar name LittraToolbar i 1 Function buttons 3 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Toolbars tab of the User Setting dialog box select the name of a user toolbar and then click the Rename button Description of each area 1 Toolbar name Edit the toolbar name directly via the keyboard By default the name of the currently selected toolbar is shown
324. the cre ated project is displayed as a tree in the Project Tree panel R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 26 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 14 Project Tree Panel After Creating a New Project i R7F701201 Microcontroller y Boot Loader Configuration Tool for Multi core e CC RH Build Tool e RAS Simulator Debug Tool 6 C File it bootasm Lathe jodefineh 14 sample multi Appl Subproject RAF MOLZ01 Microcontroller 4 CC RH Build Tool a RH3950 Simulator Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool File B podefine h Boot loader project Application project The start up source files for each project are also created in the project folder and registered in the project tree Start up source files for the boot loader project File Name Description boot asm For defining the processing from the occurrence of a reset to a branch to each application project iodefine h For defining I O registers vecttbl asm For defining the interrupt vector table Start up source files for the application project File Name Description cstartm asm For defining the start up routine for each application iodefine h For defining I O registers main c For defining the empty main function Remark 1 The application project name is boot loader project name_App1 Remark 2 Add further application projects as subprojects See 2 3 3 Add a new subproj
325. the dependencies see 2 6 Set Build Target Files 5 Set build options Set the options for the build tool Remark See CS Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build Tool Operation for details about setting build options 6 Run a build Run a build after making related settings as required see 2 7 Make Settings for Build Operations and 2 8 Run a Build Remark If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the build tool s Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands exe cuted before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set them from the Individual Compile Options tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembly source file 7 Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file see 2 9 Save the Project File In addition to the above the following operations are possible Changing the window layout see 2 10 Change the Window Layout Accelerating the startup time of CS see 2 11 Accelerate the Startup Time of CS Manipulating CS on the command line see 2 12 Manipulate CS on the Command Line R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 10 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 2 Start CS When CS is
326. the following methods Select a file in the dialog box that is opened by clicking the Browse button Drag and drop the file using such as Explorer Caution Remark If an extremely long absolute path is specified as a relative path an error could occur when click ing the OK button In this case designate the absolute path Up to 10000 lines can be entered Up to the maximum characters that are limited by the Win dows OS can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Message Specify a path The path is too long Specify a path with a number of characters equal to or fewer than maximum number of restriction in the property that called this dialog box Description The line contains space characters only The file name including the path exceeds the maximum number of restriction in the property that called this dialog box The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path contains a folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The fol lowing characters cannot be used lt gt The file name with the invalid path is desig nated The following characters cannot be used for the file name and folder name lt gt More than maximum number of paths or files specified by the caller lines cannot be speci fied The number of paths or files
327. the occurred error information This is not shown when the information does not exist The module name of a plug in not read in has the suffix added to the end The module name of a plug in read in but not functioning has the suffix added to the end R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 CENESAS Page 253 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Note 3 For a plug in not read in this is shown as Note 4 This is only shown when projects are opened when there is subproject line them up Note 5 These are not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project Note 6 This is only shown when this dialog box is opened by the Detail Version Information button in Message dialog box Edit menu Detail Version Information dialog box dedicated items Copy Copies the selected characters in the detail version information area to the clip board Select All Context menu Copy Select All Function buttons Button Copy All Text Selects all the characters in the detail version information area Copies the selected characters in the detail version information area to the clip board Selects all the characters in the detail version information area Function Copies all the characters displayed in the detail version information area to the clip board OK Closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ01
328. the project click the No button When files are being edited the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 94 Message Dialog Box When you save the files click the Yes button When you don t save the files click the No button When using external tools such as an external text editor and files are being edited the message dialog box below will open Figure 2 95 Message Dialog Box _ a a nig TF 1100 de A Project may have been changed by another program Qverwribe save Live JL tm Remark This dialog box only appears if in the Option dialog box in the General External Text Editor category you selected the Use external text editor property To continue with the operation click the OK button The Pack Settings dialog box will open R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 86 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 96 Pack Settings Dialog Box do Pack project aired tools Pack groped giy Sats this product sel and lhe woeri sel together if ikier Packie may baba s der mies fo a der dre matar Pime Visa ona Documenta Top folder of pack derpes Cork a mp be Specify the pack type project and tools or project only save location folder and the top folder of the packing target on the dialog box Caution Specify a folder other than the project folder to save to Remark Specify the top folder of the packing target to save with the project
329. the selected memory mapping area on the panel The columns not to be displayed on the panel can be set with the following method Cancel the selection of the check box of a column displayed in this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 180 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function Default Resets the display order and visible hidden settings for columns on the Memory Mapping Profiler pane to their default values Close Closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 181 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Filter Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the filter conditions when filtering the display of memory mapping information on the Mem ory Mapping Profiler panel Figure A 26 Filter Settings Dialog Box 1 no condition 1 Input the comparizon value here see o condition Function buttons _ _ 0K Cancel The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Memory Mapping Profiler panel click the filter icon 4 Y in the Details of the selected memory mapping area and then select the Custom Description of each area 1 First condition setting area top Second condition setting area bottom Configure the filter conditions In the First condition setting area top Se
330. thers category Figure 2 65 Format of build option list Property ad Eee nid process me F Duld processing i Commands executed after build processing Commands execubed after build processing 0 Other additional aptians The following placeholders are supported Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution TargetFiles Replaces with the file name being compile assemble or making link TargetFiles Program Options is set by default 2 5 Change the build target project When running a build that targets a specific project main project or subproject you must set that project as the active project Caution The active project will be the debug target Note that the active project cannot be set during connection with the debug tool be sure to disconnect the debug tool before setting the active project To set the active project select the main project or subproject to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected project as Active Project from the context menu R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 70 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 66 Set selected project as Active Project Item BMY dub Subproject E Build sample E RSFS6SNACKFI A CC RX Build T l Rebuild sample El RX Simulator 1 4 Clean sample H Windows Explorer Menu Set sub as Active
331. tions or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction When exporting the Renesas Electronics products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations It is the responsibility of the buyer or distributor of Renesas Electronics products who distributes disposes of or otherwise places the product with a third party to notify such third party in advance of the contents and conditions set forth in this document Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties as a result of unauthorized use of Renesas Electronics products This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics 2012 4 How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CS integrated development e
332. ts Displays a list of recently used projects in a cascading menu to open those projects 1 Recent Project Uses this item to open the most recently used project 2 Recent Project Uses this item to open the second most recently used project 3 Recent Project Uses this item to open the third most recently used project 4 Recent Project Uses this item to open the fourth most recently used project Exit b Edit When the rapid start is enabled this product enters the wait state When the rapid start is disabled exit from this product proceeds If there are unsaved source files or main or subproject files then a Mes sage dialog box will ask if you want to save them The Edit menu displays editing related menu commands Undoes the last action Redoes an undone action Cuts the selection and copy it into the clipboard Copies the selection into the clipboard Pastes the contents of the clipboard Delete Deletes the selection Select All Selects all items Rename Changes the name of the selected item Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box or the Trace Search dialog box if the Trace panel has focus or the Memory Search dialog box if the Memory panel has focus and perform the specified search Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box and replace the specified string with another string Go To Opens the Go to Line dialog
333. ts Remark 3 If you disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time Caution This function will also be enabled in an external text editor if the Observe registered files changing check box is selected in the General Build category of the Option dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 79 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 4 Run builds in batch with build modes You can run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has hereafter referred to as batch build Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build See 2 8 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild See 2 8 2 Run a build of all files Clean See 2 8 8 Delete intermediate files and generated files Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box will open Figure 2 84 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build l Build mode list Project Budd mode Oetined macros w sample Default Build sample Eurdiode i sub Che ful Build sub Euildiode In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project and their build modes and macro definitions is displayed Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to run a batch build and then click the Build Rebuil
334. tting Description of each area 1 Plug in list area This area shows a list of the plug ins other than build tool and debug tool plug ins installed in this product plug ins present in the Plugins folder of this product in the following format Module Name Shows the plug in module names The plug ins read in when this product is started are selected with check boxes Description Shows a simple description of the plug in Remark 1 The Editor panel plug in cannot be removed from the list of those read in and so the display is grayed out Remark 2 When this product is started from the command line plug ins below the Plugins folder specified with the np option do not appear in this area When the npall option is specified plug ins below the Plugins folder are not read in and thus nothing appears in this area See 2 12 Manipulate CS on the Command Line for details about the np and npall options R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 233 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 234 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE User Setting dialog box This dialog box allows you to customize toolbars and menus display
335. tup of external tools Configure the project General Build category General Debug category Configure building Configure debugging General Python Console category R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 ENESAS Configure the Python console Page 1 98 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Description General Text Editor category Configure the text editor General Update category Configure update Other User Information category Configure user information 2 Settings This area is used to configure the various options for the selected category For details about configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 199 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE General Startup and Exit category Use this category to configure general settings relating to startup and shutdown Figure A 35 Option
336. u wish to open Figure 2 16 Recent Projects ltem E 1 C work sample04 sampled4 mtpj_ JA 2 workesample03 sample03 mtpj FR 3 C worksample02 sample02 mtpj JE 4 C work sample sampletpj R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 28 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Open a project from the favorites menu Open a project registered on the favorites menu From the Project menu select Favorite Projects the path of the projects registered on the favorites menu is dis played as a cascading menu Select the project you wish to open Figure 2 17 Favorite Projects Item awonte Project 3 Favonte Project 4 Favonte Project 1 Register to Favorite Project Register to Favorite Project 3 Register to Favorite Project 4 Register to Favorite Project 2 4 2 Add an existing subproject Select the Project node on the project tree and if you select Add gt gt Add Subproject on the context menu the Add Existing Subproject dialog box will open nee 2 18 Add aie Subproject Dialog Box E Ade Existing borset o eo work p sample p sub Organize hia Folder EX dul e de Windows Jo DefaultBuikd de work sub misp d sample di DefaultBuild de sub de Users Ga Local Disk 0 Ga Local Disk 0 E Filename sub mbsp x Subproject File mtsp Cancel On the dialog box specify the subproject file of the subproject to add and click the Open button 2 4 3 Projec
337. ubproject Select Project node or Subproject node Then select Add gt gt Add New Subproject in File or Project menu Create Project dialog box appears Create a new subproject file Select Add gt gt Add New Subproject in the context menu of Project node or Subproject node Create Project dialog box appears Create a new subproject file c Remove a subproject from a project You can remove a subproject from a project by one of the following procedure Select the subproject that you want to delete then select Remove from Project in Project menu Select the subproject that you want to delete then select Remove from Project in the context menu Caution If the selected subproject is the active project then it cannot be removed from the project d Move subprojects You can move subprojects by the following procedure Drag the subproject you want to move then drop it in the destination Remark You can run multiple CS and drop the subproject to a different project In this case the dropped subproject is copied not moved e Select multiple nodes You can select multiple nodes in sequence by the following procedure Click or place the cursor on the start node then click with pressing the Shift key or place the cursor on the end node You can select multiple nodes one by one by the following procedures Click on the node with pressing the Ctrl key Place the cursor key on the node with
338. ug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Describe one file name on one line Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the file name If the line begins with the line is interpreted as a comment A space or tab is ignored c Import the link order specification file Click the Import button in the Link Order dialog box to open the Select Import File dialog box Figure 2 63 Select Import File Dialog Box ai eli work sample 7 l Organize Mew Folder de Windows Ly DefaultBuild de work ja sub J sample LinkOrder mits d BefaultBuild di sub d sampe d Users Ga Local Disk C ca Local Disk Q Link order specification hilo In the dialog box select the link order specification file and click the Open button The description order of the file names are acquired from the selected link order specification file and then they are reflected in File in the Link Order dialog box Figure 2 64 Link Order Dialog Box After Setting Link Order fileti obj filelo library lii File 02 ahi library OT lii library S lib R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 69 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 2 FUNCTIONS Caution 1 The file that is described in the link order specification file and is not added to the project is not displayed If the corresponding file exists the list of the file names will be displayed in the Output panel Caution 2 The file th
339. ugOnly bl RHS50 Simulator Debug T LA Clean DebugOnly gt File Open Folder with Explorer dl Windows Explorer Menu Shitt Delete Remove from Project Paste Ctrl V Rename Fa When a project is set as the active project that Project node is underlined as follows Figure E 26 Active Project UR DebugOnlly Project HM R7F701010xAFP Microcontroller A None Build Tool El RHESO Simulator Debug Tool sub Debug niy Subproject 1 TF TOIDIOZAFE Microcontroller A None Build Tool 2 RHASO Simulator Debug Tool H Ipi File Remark 1 Immediately after creating a project newly the main project is the active project Remark 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project Caution When you run a build using the toolbar button the build applies to the whole project To build only the active project run the build from the context menu of the active project R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Aug 01 2014 Page 272 of 283 CS V3 00 00 E USING AN EXTERNAL BUILD TOOL E 5 Runa Build This section explains operations related to running a build for a debug dedicated project 1 Build types The types of operations related to builds which can be linked to an external build tool in a debug dedicated project are as follows Table E 1 Build Types Description Executes the command specified with the
340. used to assign shortcut keys to the various com mands Rearrange Commands dialog box This dialog box allows you to change the arrangement including addi tion and deletion of menu items and buttons in the Main window Other Windows dialog box This dialog box is used to select one of the divide panels shown in the Main window to activate or close Version Information dialog box This dialog box is used to display versions of CS and each plug in product Detail Version Information dialog box This dialog box is used to display detail version information of this product and the present project information One Point Advice dialog box This dialog box is used to display tips for using CS R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Page 99 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Main window This is the start up window that opens when CS is launched In this window you can control the user program execution and open panels Figure A 1 Main Window a oe en a ee pr e 2 E A zen T ECN FEL Logis fil Lot ie a eg de biyi il dr or be dera q ee ie ene coders de beer ei bom be lier rr Cog Hass Prom i B ie fp las Eek bid Ga Epp ae ca die be cred oe ra ceria HE A A Sea Fira Miri P PER jel Chos Eskil Pra fcl Lakk epa al E a ia de ia dde e E dr id I Chores febelire af olule iaa ies Fgh nlr eriet Fi ri hu Pree 3 Tki pol A a H ner a A E oa ba rr br iy A rect igal rai n
341. ution This item is only enabled when a project where a subproject exists is opened Description of each area 1 Project Select a project dependent source project to be targeted when a dependent project is set The active project is selected by default 2 Dependent projects Select a project to be referenced as the dependent project at build in the check box A cyclic reference project is displayed in gray because it cannot be selected Remark When an application project is related to the RH850 boot loader project the boot loader project and the application project are fixed to the dependent source project and the dependent project respectively and they cannot be changed Note that the boot loader project and the application project are related in the Select Constituent Applica tion Projects dialog box that is opened from the Constituent application projects property of the Configu ration Tool for Multi core node R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 184 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the designated condition and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 185 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer object module files and library
342. uttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Window menu select Other Windows Remark Other Windows only appears when ten or more divide panels are open Description of each area 1 Select divide panel area Selecting a divide panel switches the target Function buttons Button Function Activate Activates the divide panel selected in the Select divide panel area and close this dialog box Close Window s Closes the divide panel selected in the Select divide panel area and close this dialog box Close Closes this dialog box R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 249 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Version Information dialog box This dialog box is used to displays versions of CS and each plug in product Figure A 61 Version Information Dialog Box e AZ Ea ee a Pe Version Information CS 1 CS for Vaux bora sone Zo 2D Renesse Dectrarics Corporation Frat etree 2 Module Meme pre Espina A Piegrated Develomert Environmed Framework Mixer a Manm vendoa of the nbegrale_ q Dabur Tool Common interface We e poon Gommon ntertscs libraries io Device hiomon oam keerlace Wesson o Common library for getire RHE 0 Busld tool ARH Phen Vic in Bak tool pusm io use O 3 ALIA Budd teal AL Fhi m Ya nz aa ax a
343. v 1 00 7tENESAS Page 13 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Node Microcontroller name Microcontroller Hereafter referred to as Microcontroller node 2 FUNCTIONS Explanation The microcontroller used in the project Boot Loader Configuration Tool for Multi core node RH850 Hereafter referred to as Configuration Tool for Multi core node The node for setting application projects which configure a project for multi core Note that this node is shown when the project type is a boot loader project Design Tool name Design Tool Hereafter referred to as Design Tool node The design tool pin configurator code generator etc used Note that Code Generator Design Tool node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated project Build tool name Build tool Hereafter referred to as Build Tool node The build tool compiler assembler etc used When the project type is a debug dedicated project None is shown as build tool name Debug tool name Debug Tool Hereafter referred to as Debug Tool node The debug tool in circuit emulator simulator etc used Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Hereafter referred to as Analyze Tool node File Hereafter referred to as File node Download files Hereafter referred to as Download files node The analyze tool used Note that this node is not shown when the project type is a debug d
344. w menu select Project Tree Description of each area 1 R20UT3101EJO100 Rev 1 00 Project tree area A WINDOW REFERENCE Project components are displayed in tree view with the following given node Node Project name Project Subsequently called Project node When each component the node or file is selected the detailed information property is displayed in the Prop erty panel You can change the settings Explanation The project s name Microcontroller name Microcontroller Hereafter referred to as Microcontroller node The microcontroller used in the project Boot Loader Configuration Tool for Multi core RH850 Hereafter referred to as Configuration Tool for Multi core node Design Tool name Design Tool Hereafter referred to as Design Tool node Build tool name Build Tool Hereafter referred to as Build Tool node The node for setting application projects which config ure a project for multi core Note that this node is shown when the project type is a boot loader project The design tool pin configurator code generator etc used Note that Code Generator Design Tool node is not shown when the project type is a debug dedicated proj ect The build tool compiler assembler etc used When the project type is a debug dedicated project None is shown as build tool name Debug tool name Debug Tool Hereafter referred to as Debug Tool node
345. xt see c Save of log When this menu is selected for the first time after launching the program the opera tion is equivalent to when selecting Save Error List As Note that this operation is invalid while building Save Error List As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the panel in the designated text file txt see c Save of log Note that this operation is invalid while user program is executed R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 7tENESAS Page 174 of 283 Aug 01 2014 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Error List panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive to Edit menu in the Error List panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected error information to the clip board Select All Selects allerror information displayed on the panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Find in Files tab target Replace Context menu Copy Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab target Copies the selected error information to the clip board Select All Selects allerror information displayed on the panel Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the currently selected error infor mation file line and column Jump to Previous Message Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the error information prior to the currently
346. y Locations that the value has been got from the debug tool is not correct in the Memory panel Coverage 100 R20UT3101EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Aug 01 2014 Font color Default color Background color LightGreen ENESAS The line for which code coverage is at 100 is displayed in this color in the Editor panel and Disassemble panel Page 207 of 283 CS V3 00 00 A WINDOW REFERENCE ltem Example Description Coverage 1 AaBbGc Font color Default color The line for which code coverage Is at 1 99 to 99 is displayed in this color in the Background color LightPink Editor panel and Disassemble panel Coverage 0 AaBbGiec Font color Default color The line for which code coverage is at 0 not yet executed is displayed in Background color LightGray this color in the Editor panel and Disas semble panel Invalid Font color Gray Non memory mapped areas in the Memory panel and filenames in the Background color Default color Project Tree panel that do not actually exist are displayed in this color Note The Default text and background colors depend on the Windows settings of the host computer Here we use the Windows defaults which are black text and white background b Use default color Displays items selected via the Setting place area using the standard text color Displays items selected via the Setting place area with a user defined text
347. y in the Out put File category from the Individual Compile Options tab The changing the name of the assembly source file is made with the Object file name property in the Output File category from the Individual Assemble Options tab See CS Integrated Develooment Environment User s Manual Build Tool Operation for how to set the individual build options Caution 2 If source files with the same name are added the target file cannot be opened during debugging Caution 3 Up to 5000 files can be added to the main project or subproject When a new file is added an empty file is created in the location specified in the Add File dialog box By double clicking the file name on the project tree you can open the Editor panel and edit the file The files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below C source file c Assembly source file asm s Symbol address file fsy Header file h inc List file for assembly program Ist lis Preprocessor expanded file for assembly program exp Assemble list file prn Link order specification file mtls Link map file map Library list file 1bp Intel Hex file hex Motorola S record file mot Text file txt Remark 1 You can use one of the procedures below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Ope

CS+ V3.00.00 Integrated Development Environment User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents